magicolor7450_7450MKIIFieldService

SERVICE MANUAL

2008.082008.08Ver. 2.0Ver. 2.0

FIELD SERVICE

i

FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2

SAFETY INFORMATION ...............................................................................................S-17

IMPORTANT NOTICE ..............................................................................................S-17

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE .....................................................S-18

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-20

Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1

Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2

magicolor 7450/7450 II Main bodyOutline ............................................................................................................................ 1

Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 7

Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 91

Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 191

Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 253

Lower feeder unitOutline ............................................................................................................................ 1

Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3

Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 25

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 29

Duplex optionOutline ............................................................................................................................ 1

Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3

Adjustment/Setting.......................................................................................................... 7

Troubleshooting............................................................................................................... 9

ii

Blank Page

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

S-1

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.

Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, Konica Minolta Business Technologies, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians.Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service Manual is complete and accurate.The user of this Service Manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this Service Manual is intended.Therefore, this Service Manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly.Keep this Service Manual also for future service.

In this Service Manual, each of three expressions " DANGER", " WARNING", and " CAUTION" is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:


IMPORTANT NOTICE

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble and property damage

:Precaution when using the copier. General

precautionElectric hazard High

temperature

:Prohibition when using the copier. General

prohibitionDo not touch with wet hand

Do not disassemble

:Direction when using the copier. General

instructionUnplug Ground/Earth


S-2

[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Konica Minolta brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. The points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-ing behind this policy.

SAFETY WARNINGS

Prohibited Actions

DANGER• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and

injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with

wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between

relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.)

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and

injury.

• Making any modification to the product unless instructed

by KMBT

• Using parts not specified by KMBT


S-3

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

Power Cord Set or Power Plug

WARNING• Use power supply cord set which meets the following

criteria:

- provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-uct's rated voltage and current, and

- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and

- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-rent capacity, and

- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.

Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.

• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

- having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and

- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and

- meets regulatory requirements for the area.

Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.

• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-

minals of the plug according to the following order:

•Black or Brown:L (line)

•White or Light Blue:N (neutral)

•Green/Yellow:PE (earth)

Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results in fire or electric shock.

AC230V

AC208V 240V


S-4

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

Konica Minolta brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and CE from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.

1. Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply

WARNING• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock.

• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same

configuration as the plug.

Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.

If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation.

• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a

capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall

outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall

outlet.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet

securely.

Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire.

? V

kw


S-5

• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product.

Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.

Connection to Power Supply

WARNING

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with

this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted

in the inlet of the product.

When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with

the fixture properly.

If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or

pinched by a table and so on.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

whether the sheath is damaged.

If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord or cord set (with plug and connec-tor on each end) specified by KMBT.

Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or elec-tric shock.

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

and wall outlet.

Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire.


S-6

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet

hand.

The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the

cable.

The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING

Wiring

WARNING• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords

in the same outlet.

If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so

using a too long extension cord may result in fire.

Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result.


S-7

2. Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Places

WARNING• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-

tile materials that may catch fire.

A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such

as rain.

A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

When not Using the Product for a long time

WARNING• When the product is not used over an extended period of

time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power

cord.

Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may

cause fire.

Ventilation

CAUTION• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it

will not be harmful to the human body.

If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room.

a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated roomb. When taking a lot of copiesc. When using multiple products at the same time

Fixing

CAUTION• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.


S-8

3. Servicing

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-

mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and

proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-

cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.

Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-

mentation.

If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect

the power plugs from the product and options.

When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. Arisk of electric shock exists.

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

WARNING• Take every care when making adjustments or performing

an operation check with the product powered.

If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover

detached.

High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-tric shock exists.


S-9

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING• When taking a report of problems from a user, check each

part and repair properly.

A risk of product trouble, injury, and fire exists.

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other

damages.

The user or CE may be injured.

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and

screws to fall into the product.

They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-

cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona

unit.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.


• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for

deterioration and sign of leakage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)

incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has

been disconnected.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.


S-10

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply

power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-

ing position.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-

ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose

of the used lithium battery using the method specified by

local authority.

Improper replacement can cause explosion.

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,

optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-

tion state.


• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and

check whether the interlock functions properly.

If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp

edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.


• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-

tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-

nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay

special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,

forgotten screws, etc.)

A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING


S-11

Handling of Consumables

WARNING• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care

must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the

substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be

stimulative.

If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.

Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Isopropyl alcohol and acetone are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before

any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully

evaporated.


• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take

care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately

wipe it off.


• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.


S-12

4. Fuse

5. Used Batteries Precautions

Fuse

CAUTION• CAUTION

Double pole / neutral fusing

• ATTENTIONDouble pôle / Fusible sur le neutre

Handling of batteries

CAUTION• ALL Areas

CAUTIONDanger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

• GermanyVORSICHT!

Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.

• FranceATTENTION

Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recom-mandé par le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

• DenmarkADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

• Finland, SwedenVAROlTUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

VARNINGExplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-tillverkaren.Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

• NorwayADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.


S-13

[4] Laser Safety

• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual.

1. Internal Laser Radiation

*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.

• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.

semiconductor laser

Maximum power of the laser diode 10 mW

Maximum average radiation power (*) 8.0 µW

Wavelength 775-800 nm

4039P0C504DB

Laser Aperture ofthe Print Head Unit


S-14

U.S.A., Canada(CDRH Regulation)• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-

dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

• The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.

.

All Areas

Denmark

CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

semiconductor laser



CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

semiconductor laser



ADVARSEL• Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.

Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1 sikkerheds kravene.

halvlederlaser

Laserdiodens højeste styrke 10 mW

bølgelængden 775-800 nm


S-15

Finland, Sweden

Norway

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

VAROITUS!• Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-

taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser-säteilylle.

puolijohdelaser

Laserdiodin suurin teho 10 mW

aallonpituus 775-800 nm

VARNING!• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,

kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.

halvledarlaser

Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 10 mW

våglängden 775-800 nm

VARO!• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle laser-

säteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.

VARNING!• Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.

Betrakta ej stråien.

ADVERSEL• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-

ing, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1.

halvleder laser

Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 10 mW

bølgelengde 775-800 nm


S-16

2. Laser Safety Label

• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.

3. Laser Caution Label

• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

4039P0E506DB

4039P0C502DB

SAFETY INFORMATION

S-17

4. PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications.

• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.

• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles.

• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.

• The print head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field. Replace the unit or assembly including the control board. Therefore, remove the laser diode, and do not per-form control board trimmer adjustment.

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Admin-istration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States.

This copier is certified as a "Class 1" laser product under the U.S.Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emit-ted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.

SAFETY INFORMATION

IMPORTANT NOTICE

SAFETY INFORMATION

S-18

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.

INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

4039P0C505DB

High voltage

• This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid get-ting an electric shock.

High voltage

• This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

SAFETY INFORMATION

S-19

CAUTION:

4039P0C501DB

WARNING

• Do not position the used waste toner box so that it is standing on end or tilted, otherwise toner may spill.

WARNING

• Do not burn used toner cartridges.Toner expelled from the fire is dan-gerous.

WARNING

• Do not burn used imaging units.Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.

CAUTION

• The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns.

• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our service office.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

S-20

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.

2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.

3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.

4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-fied by every distributor.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

C-1

Composition of the service manualThis service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to

explain the main machine and its corresponding options.

Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of

the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationship

between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of

each part.

Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-

tomer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance

steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.

The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be

applied to the following configuration.

<Theory of Operation section>

<Field Service section>

OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,

product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path

COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit,

operating system, and control system

OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration, and product

specifications

MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-

vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,

and firmware version up method etc.

ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical

adjustment etc.

TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and

their countermeasures etc.

APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing

chart, overall layout drawing are attached.

C-2

Notation of the service manualA. Product nameIn this manual, each of the products is described as follows:

B. Brand nameThe company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or

the registered trademark of each company.

(1) magicolor 7450/magicolor 7450 II: Main body

(2) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95

Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98

Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me

Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT

Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP

Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista

When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:

Windows 95/98/Me

Windows NT 4.0/2000

Windows NT/2000/XP/Vista

Windows 95/98/Me/ NT/2000/XP/Vista

SERVICE MANUAL

2008.08Ver. 2.0

FIELD SERVICE

Main body

Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change forimprovement of their performance. Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.

When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will beissued with a revision mark added as required.

Revision mark:• To indicate clearly a specific section revised within text, is shown at the left margin of the

corresponding revised section.The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.

• To indicate clearly a specific page that contains a revision or revisions, the page number appear-ing at the left or right bottom of the specific page is marked with .The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.

NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.

• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.

• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.

1

1

11

2008/08 2.0Description addition of magicolor 7450 II, error corrections

2006/05 1.0 — Issue of the first edition

Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision

1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

i

CONTENTS

magicolor 7450/7450 II Main body

Outline1. System configuration............................................................................................... 1

2. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 2

Maintenance3. Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 7

3.1 Maintenance items................................................................................................ 7

3.1.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) ............................................................ 7

3.1.2 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print)....................................... 7



3.2 Maintenance parts ................................................................................................ 9

3.2.1 Replacement parts........................................................................................ 9

3.3 Concept of parts life............................................................................................ 11

3.4 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)................................................ 13

3.4.1 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller (standard) .................................................. 13

3.4.2 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller ......................................................... 14

3.4.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller (bypass)..................................................... 15

3.4.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller ......................................................... 17

3.4.5 Replacing the waste toner bottle................................................................. 18

3.4.6 Replacing the ozone filter............................................................................ 19

3.4.7 Replacing the deodorant filter ..................................................................... 20

3.4.8 Replacing the dust filter/vertical conveyance .............................................. 20

3.4.9 Replacing the dust filter/cooling fan ............................................................ 21

3.4.10 Replacing the transfer roller ........................................................................ 21

3.4.11 Replacing the transfer belt unit ................................................................... 22

3.4.12 Replacing the toner cartridge Y,M,C,K........................................................ 24

3.4.13 Replacing the imaging unit Y,M,C,K............................................................ 26

3.4.14 Replacing the fusing unit............................................................................. 29

4. Service tool ........................................................................................................... 32

4.1 CE tool list........................................................................................................... 32

4.2 Print materials..................................................................................................... 33

4.2.1 Imaging unit single parts (IU) ...................................................................... 33

4.2.2 Toner cartridge single parts (T/C) ............................................................... 33

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


ii

4.2.3 Waste toner bottle....................................................................................... 33

4.2.4 Maintenance kit........................................................................................... 33

5. Firmware upgrade................................................................................................. 34

5.1 Checking the current firmware version ............................................................... 34

5.2 Firmware upgrading procedure by updater ........................................................ 34

5.2.1 Updating method ........................................................................................ 34

5.2.2 Checking the version after the firmware update ......................................... 46

6. Other ..................................................................................................................... 47

6.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 47

6.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) .............................................. 48

6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list................................................................. 48

6.2.2 Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 49

6.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure...................................................................... 50

6.3.1 Rear left cover/front left cover/upper front cover......................................... 50

6.3.2 Rear right cover/rear cover ......................................................................... 51

6.3.3 Tray 1 left cover /tray 1 right cover /tray 1 upper cover ............................... 51

6.3.4 Front Door................................................................................................... 52

6.3.5 Exit tray ....................................................................................................... 52

6.3.6 Control panel .............................................................................................. 54

6.3.7 Tray 2 .......................................................................................................... 55

6.3.8 Front Cover ................................................................................................. 56

6.3.9 Controller board (PWB-P)........................................................................... 58

6.3.10 Memory (DIMM0)........................................................................................ 59

6.3.11 Hard disk kit (Option) .................................................................................. 60

6.3.12 Mechanical control board (PWB-M)............................................................ 60

6.3.13 RTC board (PWB-R)................................................................................... 63

6.3.14 DC power supply (PU1) .............................................................................. 64

6.3.15 High voltage unit (HV1)............................................................................... 65

6.3.16 Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I)................................................................. 66

6.3.17 PH interface board (PWB-D)....................................................................... 67

6.3.18 Multi bypass unit ......................................................................................... 69

6.3.19 PH unit ........................................................................................................ 70

6.3.20 Transport drive assy.................................................................................... 74

6.3.21 Hopper drive assy....................................................................................... 76

6.3.22 Right door assy........................................................................................... 78

6.3.23 Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) assy.................................................................. 80

6.3.24 Color developing motor (M3) ...................................................................... 80

6.3.25 Color PC drum motor (M2) ......................................................................... 81

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


iii

6.3.26 Toner supply motor C/K (M7) ...................................................................... 81

6.3.27 Toner supply motor Y/M (M6)...................................................................... 82

6.3.28 Main motor (M1).......................................................................................... 82

6.3.29 Fusing drive motor (M4) .............................................................................. 83

6.3.30 IDC/registration sensor/1, IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE1/SE2)................. 83

6.4 Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 86

6.4.1 PH window .................................................................................................. 86

6.4.2 Transfer belt ................................................................................................ 87

6.4.3 Tray 2 feed roller (standard) ........................................................................ 87

6.4.4 Tray 2 separation roller................................................................................ 87

6.4.5 Tray 1 feed roller (bypass)........................................................................... 88

6.4.6 Tray 1 separation roller................................................................................ 88

6.4.7 Registration roller ........................................................................................ 89

6.4.8 Area around the waste toner collecting port ............................................... 90

Adjustment/Setting7. How to Use the adjustment section....................................................................... 91

8. Description of the control panel............................................................................. 92

8.1 Control panel display .......................................................................................... 92

8.1.1 Parts of the control panel display ................................................................ 92

8.1.2 Message structure ...................................................................................... 93

8.1.3 Normal messages ....................................................................................... 94

8.1.4 Menu ........................................................................................................... 98

8.1.5 Operator call messages .............................................................................. 99

8.1.6 Service call messages .............................................................................. 100

8.1.7 Help screen............................................................................................... 101

8.2 List of control panel messages ......................................................................... 102

8.2.1 Normal messages ..................................................................................... 102

8.2.2 Operator call messages ............................................................................ 104

8.2.3 Service call messages .............................................................................. 107

8.3 Cancelling a print job ........................................................................................ 109

9. Menu ................................................................................................................... 110

9.1 List of Menu functions....................................................................................... 110

9.2 PROOF/PRINT MENU...................................................................................... 114

9.3 PRINT MENU ................................................................................................... 114

9.3.1 CONFIGURATION PG .............................................................................. 114

9.3.2 DEMO PAGE............................................................................................. 115

9.3.3 STATISTICS PAGE.................................................................................... 115

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


iv

9.3.4 FONT LIST ............................................................................................... 118

9.3.5 MENU MAP .............................................................................................. 119

9.3.6 DIRECTORY LIST .................................................................................... 119

9.4 PAPER MENU .................................................................................................. 119

9.4.1 PAPER SOURCE...................................................................................... 119

9.4.2 DUPLEX ................................................................................................... 123

9.4.3 COPIES .................................................................................................... 124

9.4.4 COLLATE.................................................................................................. 124

9.5 QUALITY MENU............................................................................................... 124

9.5.1 COLOR MODE ......................................................................................... 124

9.5.2 BRIGHTNESS .......................................................................................... 124

9.5.3 PCL SETTING .......................................................................................... 125

9.5.4 PS SETTING ............................................................................................ 127

9.5.5 CALIBRATION .......................................................................................... 132

9.5.6 COLOR SEPARATION.............................................................................. 133

9.5.7 THIN LINE MODE..................................................................................... 133

9.6 CAMERA DIRECT............................................................................................ 133

9.6.1 PAPER SOURCE...................................................................................... 133

9.6.2 LAYOUT .................................................................................................... 134

9.6.3 PAPER MARGIN....................................................................................... 134

9.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY ...................................................................................... 134

9.7 INTERFACE MENU.......................................................................................... 135

9.7.1 JOB TIMEOUT.......................................................................................... 135

9.7.2 ETHERNET .............................................................................................. 136

9.7.3 CAMERA DIRECT.................................................................................... 138

9.8 SYS DEFAULT MENU ...................................................................................... 138

9.8.1 LANGUAGE .............................................................................................. 138

9.8.2 EMULATION ............................................................................................. 139

9.8.3 PAPER ...................................................................................................... 141

9.8.4 STARTUP OPTIONS ................................................................................ 143

9.8.5 AUTO CONTINUE .................................................................................... 143

9.8.6 HOLD JOB TIMEOUT............................................................................... 143

9.8.7 ENERGY SAVER...................................................................................... 144

9.8.8 ENERGY SAVER TIME ............................................................................ 144

9.8.9 MENU TIMEOUT...................................................................................... 144

9.8.10 LCD BRIGHTNESS .................................................................................. 144

9.8.11 SECURITY................................................................................................ 145

9.8.12 CLOCK ..................................................................................................... 146

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


v

9.8.13 HDD FORMAT .......................................................................................... 146

9.8.14 CARD FORMAT ........................................................................................ 147

9.8.15 RESTORE DEFAULTS.............................................................................. 147

9.8.16 ENABLE WARNING.................................................................................. 153

9.8.17 IMAGING UNIT LIFE................................................................................. 154

9.9 MAINTENANCE MENU.................................................................................... 155

9.9.1 How to enter the MAINTENANCE MENU................................................. 155

9.9.2 PRINT MENU............................................................................................ 155

9.9.3 ALIGNMENT ............................................................................................. 156

10. Adjustment item list ............................................................................................. 160

11. SERVICE MENU ................................................................................................. 161

11.1 How to enter the SERVICE MENU ................................................................... 161

11.2 Service mode function tree............................................................................... 161

11.3 SERVICE MENU setting/adjustment ................................................................ 163

11.3.1 SERIAL NUMBER..................................................................................... 163

11.3.2 FIRMWARE VERSION ............................................................................. 163

11.3.3 ALIGNMENT ............................................................................................. 163

11.3.4 DIAGNOSIS MENU................................................................................... 173

11.3.5 RESTORE PASSWARD............................................................................ 186

11.3.6 SOFT SWITCH ......................................................................................... 186

12. Mechanical adjustment ....................................................................................... 187

12.1 Mechanical adjustment of the tray 1 ................................................................. 187

12.1.1 Adjustment of the tray 1 media size unit ................................................... 187

12.2 PH unit mechanical adjustment ........................................................................ 189

12.2.1 Skew adjustment....................................................................................... 189

Troubleshooting13. Jam display ......................................................................................................... 191

13.1 Misfeed display ................................................................................................. 191

13.2 Misfeed display resetting procedure ................................................................. 191

13.3 Sensor layout .................................................................................................... 192

13.4 Solution............................................................................................................. 193

13.4.1 Initial check items...................................................................................... 193

13.4.2 Misfeed at fusing/exit section .................................................................... 193

13.4.3 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section ...................................................... 194

13.4.4 Misfeed at tray 1 media feed section......................................................... 195

13.4.5 Misfeed at tray 2 media feed section......................................................... 196

14. Service call message .......................................................................................... 197

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


vi

14.1 Trouble codes ................................................................................................... 197

14.1.1 Trouble code list ........................................................................................ 197

14.2 How to reset ..................................................................................................... 201

14.3 Solution ............................................................................................................ 202

14.3.1 0001: Main motor turning at abnormal timing ........................................... 202

14.3.2 0018: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn ............................................. 202

14.3.3 0019: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing......................... 202

14.3.4 001A: Color developing motor’s failure to turn .......................................... 203

14.3.5 001B: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing ..................... 203

14.3.6 0040: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn ................................................... 203

14.3.7 0043: Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn ................................................ 204

14.3.8 0046: Fusing cooling fan motor /1’s failure to turn .................................... 204

14.3.9 0048: Fusing cooling fan motor /2’s failure to turn .................................... 204

14.3.10 004C: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn ................................... 205

14.3.11 004E: Power supply cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ............................. 205

14.3.12 004F: Cooling fan motor 2’s failure to turn................................................ 205

14.3.13 0094: 2nd image transfer roller separation ............................................... 206

14.3.14 0096: Transfer belt separation .................................................................. 206

14.3.15 0301: Polygon motor/C failure to turn ....................................................... 207

14.3.16 0302: Polygon motor/M failure to turn....................................................... 207

14.3.17 0303: Polygon motor/Y failure to turn ....................................................... 207

14.3.18 0304: Polygon motor/K failure to turn ....................................................... 207

14.3.19 0311: Laser malfunction (cyan) ................................................................ 207

14.3.20 0312: Laser malfunction (magenta) .......................................................... 207

14.3.21 0313: Laser malfunction (yellow) .............................................................. 207

14.3.22 0314: Laser malfunction (black)................................................................ 207

14.3.23 0500: Heating roller warm-up failure......................................................... 208

14.3.24 0501: Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure ........................................... 208

14.3.25 0510: Abnormally low heating roller temperature ..................................... 208

14.3.26 0511: Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature ........................ 208

14.3.27 0520: Abnormally high heating roller temperature.................................... 208

14.3.28 0521: Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature ....................... 208

14.3.29 0960: Manual tray rise descent error ........................................................ 208

14.3.30 0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor .............. 209

14.3.31 0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor........ 209

14.3.32 0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor............ 209

14.3.33 0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor............. 209

14.3.34 0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor ...... 209

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


vii

14.3.35 0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor........... 209

14.3.36 0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor.............. 210

14.3.37 0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor ............ 210

14.3.38 0F3A: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure.............................................. 211

14.3.39 0F3B: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure ........................................ 211

14.3.40 0F3C: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure............................................ 211

14.3.41 0F3D: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure ............................................. 211

14.3.42 13B0: RTC failure...................................................................................... 212

14.3.43 13C8: Transfer unit new article release..................................................... 212

14.3.44 13CA: Fusing unit new article release ...................................................... 212

14.3.45 13D1: Cyan imaging unit EEPROM access error ..................................... 213

14.3.46 13D2: Magenta imaging unit EEPROM access error................................ 213

14.3.47 13D3: Yellow imaging unit EEPROM access error.................................... 213

14.3.48 13D4: Black imaging unit EEPROM access error ..................................... 213

14.3.49 13D9: Cyan toner cartridge EEPROM access error ................................. 213

14.3.50 13DA: Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error ............................... 213

14.3.51 13DB: Magenta toner cartridge EEPROM access error ........................... 213

14.3.52 13DC: Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error ................................ 213

14.3.53 13E2: Flash ROM write error .................................................................... 214

14.3.54 3000: Main motor’s failure to turn.............................................................. 214

14.3.55 C002: RAM (standard) error at startup ..................................................... 214

14.3.56 C003: RAM (option) error at startup.......................................................... 214

14.3.57 C013: MAC address error ......................................................................... 215

14.3.58 C015: BOOT ROM error ........................................................................... 215

14.3.59 C022: NVRAM error .................................................................................. 215

14.3.60 C025, C026, C027: Controller ROM error................................................. 215

14.3.61 C050: Hard disk access error ................................................................... 216

14.3.62 C051: Hard disk full error .......................................................................... 216

14.3.63 C052: Compact flash access error............................................................ 217

14.3.64 C053: Compact flash full error .................................................................. 217

14.3.65 C054: Compact flash uninstallation .......................................................... 218

14.3.66 C060: Firmware update error.................................................................... 218

14.3.67 C061: Hold job error/no duplex unit .......................................................... 219

14.3.68 C062: Hold job error/no tray 3................................................................... 219

14.3.69 C063: Hold job error/no tray 4................................................................... 219

14.3.70 C064: Hold job error/no memory............................................................... 219

14.3.71 C065: Hold job error/no tray5.................................................................... 219

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


viii

14.3.72 FFFF: Interface communication error ....................................................... 219

15. Power supply trouble........................................................................................... 220

15.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check) .................................... 220

15.2 Control panel indicators do not light. ................................................................ 221

15.3 Fusing heaters do not operate ......................................................................... 221

15.4 Power is not supplied to option......................................................................... 222

15.4.1 Optional lower feeder unit ......................................................................... 222

15.4.2 Power is not supplied to duplex option...................................................... 222

16. Image quality problem......................................................................................... 223

16.1 How to read element date ................................................................................ 223

16.2 How to identify problematic part ....................................................................... 224

16.2.1 Initial check items ..................................................................................... 224

16.3 Solution ............................................................................................................ 225

16.3.1 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction..................................................................................... 225

16.3.2 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction................................................................................... 226

16.3.3 Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction ..................................... 227

16.3.4 Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction ................................... 228

16.3.5 Monocolor: low image density .................................................................. 229

16.3.6 Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure ................................................ 231

16.3.7 Monocolor: foggy background................................................................... 232

16.3.8 Monocolor: void areas, white spots .......................................................... 234

16.3.9 Monocolor: colored spots ......................................................................... 235

16.3.10 Monocolor: blurred image......................................................................... 236

16.3.11 Monocolor: blank print, black print ............................................................ 237

16.3.12 Monocolor: uneven image ........................................................................ 238

16.3.13 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction............................................................................................ 239

16.3.14 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction............................................................................................ 240

16.3.15 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction .......................................... 241

16.3.16 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction ........................................ 242

16.3.17 4-Color: low image density ....................................................................... 243

16.3.18 4-Color: poor color reproduction............................................................... 244

16.3.19 4-Color: incorrect color image registration................................................ 245

16.3.20 4-Color: void areas, white spots ............................................................... 246

16.3.21 4-Color: colored spots .............................................................................. 247

16.3.22 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset .................................................. 248

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


ix

16.3.23 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image ......................................................... 249

16.3.24 4-Color: back marking............................................................................... 250

16.3.25 4-Color: uneven image.............................................................................. 251

Appendix17. Parts layout drawing ............................................................................................ 253

17.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 253

17.1.1 Engine section .......................................................................................... 253

17.1.2 Tray 1 / Tray 2............................................................................................ 257

17.2 Lower feeder unit (option) ................................................................................. 258

17.3 Duplex option (option)....................................................................................... 259

18. Connector layout drawing.................................................................................... 260

19. Timing chart ........................................................................................................ 262

19.1 Main body ......................................................................................................... 262

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gA

pp

en

dix


x

Blank Page

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 1. System configuration

1 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

e

Outline1. System configuration

*1: The color of the outer cover of this option is different between the option for 7450 and that for 7450II.

NOTE• Use the Desk or the paper feed cabinet without fail when installing on the floor in

order to keep the function and quality of the unit.

[1] Main Body (magicolor7450/magicolor7450II) [5] Caster Base

[2] Duplex Option *1 [6] DIMM

[3] Banner Tray [7] Hard Disk Kit

[4] Lower Feeder Unit (500 sheets) *1 [8] Compact Flash Card

4039T1J101AA

[1]

[4]

[6]

[5]

[2]

[3][7]

[8]

Tray 3

Tray 4

Tray 5

1

1

1

1

2. Product specifications Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

2

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

e

2. Product specificationsA. Type

Type Desktop tandem full color A3 laser beam printer

Printing System Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper

PC Drum Type OPC (organic photo conductor)

Paper Feeding Separation System

Tray 1 (Manual bypass) : Small diameter roller separation systemTray 2 : Small diameter roller separation system

Exposure System • Four-multi array PH unit system• Two-beam LD + polygon mirror exposure system for Y, M, C, and K

(8 beams in total)

Exposure Density 600 dpi × 600 dpi × 4 bit

Developing System HMT developing system

Charging System DC comb electrode Scorotron system

Image Transfer System Intermediate transfer belt system

Paper Separating System Selection either application of nonwoven fabric bias or resistor grounding + lower-pressure paper separate claws

Fusing System Roller fusing

Paper Exit System Face down

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 2. Product specifications

3 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

e

B. Functions

Warm-up Time 99 sec. or less (at ambient temperature of 23° C/73.4° F and rated source voltage)

Image Loss Leading edge: 4.2 mm, Trailing edge: 4.2 mm, Rear edge: 4.0 mm, Front edge: 4.0 mm

First Print Time(Tray 2)

Monochrome print A4 8.1 sec. or less

8.5 x 11 8.2 sec. or less

Color print A4 11.4 sec. or less

8.5 x 11 11.4 sec. or less

Processing Speed Plain Paper(64 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb)

111 mm/sec

Thick Paper (91 to 256 g/m2 /24.25 to 68 lb), OHP, Post card, Envelope, Label sheet

55.5 mm/sec

Printing Speed for Multi-print Cycle(crosswise feeding)

Monochrome print/ Color print

A4 1-sided: 25 prints/min.2-sided: 23.5 prints/min.

8.5 x 11 1-sided: 24.5 prints/min.2-sided: 23.0 prints/min.

Print Paper Size Tray1:Multi manual feed trayTray2:Multi purpose casette

A3 Wide, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, 8K, 16K, D8K, Kai8, Kai16, Kai32, Env.C5, Env.C6, Env.DL, Env.#10, Env.You#4,Env.Chou#3, Env.Chou#4, Env.Monarch, 12×18, 11×17, 11×14, Foolscap(8×13), Folio(8.3 ×13),Legal(8.5 ×14), Govt.Legal(8.5 ×13), Letter(8.5 ×11), Letter-R(8.5 ×11R),Govt.Letter-R(8.0 × 10.5R), UK Quart(8 ×10), Executive(7.3 × 10.5), Postcard (Japan only), Double-Postcard (Japan only),Statement-R(5.5 × 8.5R), 4×6-R

Tray3, Tray4, Tray5(Option)

A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 16K, D8K,11×17, 11×14, Legal(8.5 ×14), Govt.Legal(8.5 ×13), Letter(8.5 ×11), Letter-R(8.5 ×11-R),Statement-R(5.5 × 8.5 R)

Long size paper (127 to 160 g/m2)* Tray 1 only* The Expanded Memory Unit is needed.

Width : 210 × 297 mmLength: 458 × 1200 mm

Print Exit Tray Capacity

Plain Paper, A4 350 sheets

1

1


4

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

e

C. Types of Paper

*1: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3 is used.*2: Optional Lower Feeder Unit : Only the Plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb)

is reliably fed.

D. Maintenance

Type Paper Source (maximum tray capacity)

Tray1 (Multiple Bypass)

Tray2 Tray3, 4, 5 (Option) *2

Print paper type

Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2 / 16 to 24 lb)

❍ (100 sheets) ❍ (250 sheets) ❍ (500 sheets)

OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only)

❍

(10 sheets or less)❍

(50 sheets or less)–

Thick paper 1 (91 to 150 g/m2 / 24.25 to 40 lb)

–

Thick paper 2 (151 to 210 g/m2

/ 40.25 to 55.75 lb)

–

Thick paper 3 (211 to 256 g/m2

/ 56.25 to 68 lb) *1

❍


Envelopes –

Labels ❍


Translucent paper – – –

Postcard – – –

Print paper dimensions

Width 90 to 311 mm3.5 to 12.25 inch

90 to 311 mm3.5 to 12.25 inch

140 to 297 mm5.5 to 11.75 inch

Length 140 to 457 mm5.5 to 18 inch

140 to 457 mm5.5 to 18 inch

182 to 432 mm7.25 to 17 inch

Long size paper

Width 210 to 297 mm 8.25 to 11.75 inch

– –

Length 457 to 1200 mm18 to 47.25 inch

– –

1

No. of pages printed per month

Average 4,000 prints(Color:2,000 prints, Monochrome:2,000 prints)

Max 10,000 prints

Standard print mode Color print/ Mono-chrome print

3 pages/job

Standard Original Density

Color print C, M, Y, K 5%

Monochrome print K 5%

1


5

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

e

E. Machine Specifications

*1: width when the bypass tray is closed*2: Space Requirements are the values, the bypass tray is opened to the maximum.

F. Operating Environment

Power Requirements Voltage: AC 110 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V

Frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 3.0 Hz

Max Power Consumption Less than 1450 W (120 V, 12 A / 220 - 240 V, 6.5 A)

Dimensions 648 *1 (W) × 606 (D) × 477 (H) mm25.5 *1 (W) × 23.9 (D) × 18.8 (H) inch

Space Requirements 966 *2 (W) × 606 (D) mm 38.0 *2 (W) × 23.9 (D) inch

Weight Main body Approx. 50.5 kg / 111.3 lb (without IU and TC)

IU and TC 8.9 kg

Temperature 10 to 35 °C / 50 to 95 °F (with a fluctuation of 10 °C / 18 °F or less per hour)

Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 20%/h)

Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.

1


6

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ou

tlin

e

G. Print Functions

NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Type Built-in PS/PCL controller

RAM Standard 256 MB, max 1,024 MB

HDD 40 GB (Option)

Compact Flash Card 256 MB or 512 MB (commercially available)

Interface Ethernet: 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX, 1000 Base-TUSB 2.0 (High-speed)IEEE 1284 (Parallel)PictBridge (digital camera direct connection)

Supported Protocols TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk, UDP

Printer Language PCL5e/c EmulationPCL6 (XL Ver. 3.0) EmulationPostScript 3 Emulation (3016)PDF Emulation (1.6 Command Level) (When HDD or Compact Flash Card is mounted)Direct Print (JPEG/TIFF) (When HDD or Compact Flash Card is mounted)

Printer Fonts PCL :Latin 80 FontsPostscript :Emulation Latin 136 Fonts

Supported Operating Systems

7450 only Windows 98 SE/MeWindows NT 4.0 (SP6a)

7450/7450II Windows 2000 SP4 or laterWindows XP SP2 or laterWindows 2003 ServerWindows VistaMac OS 9.1 or laterMac OS X 10.2, 10.3 10.4 or 10.5Redhat Linux v9.0Susse Linux v8.2Netware 4, 5, 6 or later

1

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. Periodical check

7

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

Maintenance3. Periodical check

3.1 Maintenance items

3.1.1 Parts to be replaced by users (CRU)

*1: Also replace the dust filter/cooling fan packed in the waste toner bottle at the same time when the waste toner bottle is replaced.

*2: Also replace the deodorant filter packed in the toner cartridge K at the same time when 7,500/15,000 is reached.

*3: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.

3.1.2 Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 120,000-print)

*1: Replace those four parts at the same time.

No. Class Parts to be replaced Cycle Clean Replace Descriptions

1

Processing sections

Imaging unit Y,M,C 30,000 ●

2 Imaging unit K 50,000 ●

3 Dust filter/cooling fan 18,000 ● *1

4Toner cartridge Y,M,C(After consumable)

6,000/12,000 ●

5Toner cartridge Y,M,C(Prepackaged)

3,000 ●

6Toner cartridge K(After consumable)

7,500/15,000 ● *2

7Toner cartridge K(Prepackaged)

3,000 ●

8 Fusing section Deodorant filter 7,500/15,000 ● *2

9Image transfer section

Waste toner bottle (18,000) ● *1, 3

No. Class Parts to be replaced Quantity Check Clean ReplaceLubrica-

tionDescript

ions

1Overall

Media feed and image conditions

●

2 Appearance ● ●

3Fusing section

Fusing unit 1 ●

4Conveyance sec-tion

Transfer roller 1 ●

*1

5Dust filter/vertical conveyance

1 ●

6Image Transfer section

Transfer belt unit 1 ●

7Processing sec-tion

Ozone filter 1 ●

3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

8

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce




tionDescrip-

tions

1Overall


●


3Tray 1, 2

Feed roller 1 ●

4 Separation roller 1 ●


tionDescrip-

tions

1Overall


●


3Lower feeder unit

Pick-up roller 1 ●

4 Feed roller 1 ●

5 Separation roller 1 ●


9

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.2 Maintenance parts

• To ensure that the machine produces good prints and to extend its service life, it is rec-ommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed.

• The replacing time is to be determined by the total counter value.• Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8.5 x 11, standard mode and

energy saver OFF.

3.2.1 Replacement parts

A. Main unit

*1: Also replace the transfer roller, dust filter/vertical conveyance and ozone filter packed in the transfer belt at the same time when 120,000 is reached.(Part No. of the transfer belt unit: 4039 R716 00)

*2: Also replace the deodorant filter packed in the toner cartridge K at the same time when 7,500 or 15,000 is reached.

*3: Also replace the dust filter/cooling fan packed in the waste toner bottle at the same time when the waste toner bottle is replaced.

No. Classification Parts name Qt.Actual

durable cycleParts No. Descriptions

1Tray 2

Tray 2 feed roller (standard)

1 200,000 4034 3012 ##

2 Tray 2 separation roller 1 200,000 4034 0151 ##

3Tray 1

Tray 1 feed roller (bypass)

1 200,000 4131 3001 ##

4 Tray 1 separation roller 1 200,000 4034 0151 ##

5 Conveyance section

Transfer roller 1 120,000 ⎯ *1

6Dust filter/vertical conveyance

1 120,000 ⎯ *1

7Fusing section

Fusing unit 1 120,000

4039 0751 ## *4

4039 0752 ## *5

4039 0753 ## *6

8 Deodorant filter 1 7,500/15,000 ⎯ *2

9

Processing section

Imaging unit Y/M/C 1 30,000 ⎯

10 Imaging unit K 1 50,000 ⎯

11 Ozone filter 1 120,000 ⎯ *1

12Toner cartridge Y/M/C(prepackaged)

1 3,000 ⎯

13Toner cartridge Y/M/C(after consumable)

1 6,000/12,000 ⎯

14Toner cartridge K(prepackaged)

1 3,000 ⎯

15Toner cartridge K(after consumable)

1 7,500/15,000 ⎯ *2

16 Dust filter/cooling fan 1 18,000 ⎯ *3

17Image transfer section

Transfer belt unit 1 120,000 4039 R716 00 *1

18 Waste toner bottle 1 (18,000)4065 621 *3, 7, 8

4065 622 *3, 7, 9


10

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

*4: 100 V areas only.*5: 110 V-127 V areas only.*6: 220-240 V areas only.*7: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.*8: Only for the areas except for USA and Canada.*9: Only for the USA and Canada.

B. Option

*1: See the lower feeder unit service manual.

No. Classification Parts name Qt.Actual

durable cycleParts No. Descriptions

1Lower feeder unit

Feed roller 1 300,000 4030 3005 ##

*12 Separation roller 1 300,000 4030 3005 ##

3 Pick-up roller 1 300,000 4030 0151 ##


11

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.3 Concept of parts life

*1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.*2: Once the toner-full is detected, it has to be replaced with the new waste toner bottle in

order to reset.*3: The count condition is different according to the media length of the sub scanning direc-

tion.

Description Near life value Life value /

Max. number of printed pages

Waste toner bottle

A waste toner full condition is detected when about 2,500 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected.When the maximum number of printed pages is reached, the print is inhibited.

⎯ 18,000 *1, 2

DescriptionLife value

(Specification value)

Max. number of printed pages

Fusing unit

The number of prints made is counted. *3The number of prints made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the fus-ing drive motor has turned translated to a corre-sponding value of the number of prints made and the value, whichever reaches the life specification value, is detected.When the maximum number of printed pages is reached, the print is inhibited.

120,000 150,000

Transfer beltIt is detected by counting the number of hours the transfer belt turns. The printing is prohibited when it reaches to the maximum printed pages.

120,000 150,000

Imaging unit C/M/Y

The hours which the PC drum has turned is com-pared with the value of the number of hours through which the imaging roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of hours and the value, which-ever reaches the life specification value, is detected.* The hours which the PC drum has turned is the

value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value.

30,000 32,000

Imaging unit K

50,000 52,000

Length of the sub scanning direction

Number of counts

216 mm or less 1 count

216 mm to 432 mm 2 counts



over 864 mm 5 counts


12

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

A. Conditions for life specifications values• The life specification values represent the number of prints made or figures equivalent to

it when given conditions (see the table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.

Item Description

Job typeMonochrome: Making 3 prints per jobColor: Making 3 prints per job

Media size A4/Letter

Color ratio Black to Color = 1:1

PV/M Black: 2,000 / Color: 2,000

Original density B/W = 5 % for each color, 5 % for monochrome

No. of operating days per month

20 days (Main power switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)


13 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)

NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of magicolor 7450.

The same procedure is applicable to magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the

isopropyl alcohol.

3.4.1 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller (standard)

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 2 feed roller: 200,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Pull out the tray 2.

2. Lock the media lifting plate [1] into position.

3. Snap off the C-clip [2] from the tray 2 feed roller (standard) assy [3].

4. Remove the shaft for the tray 2 feed roller (standard) assy [3] from the front bushing.

5. Snap off the C-clip [1], one collar [2] and remove the tray 2 feed roller (standard) [3].

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

NOTE• Replace the tray 2 feed roller (standard) and tray 2 separation roller at the same

time.

1

[1]

[3]

[2]

4038F2C001DB

4037F2C003DC

[1]

[3]

[2]


14

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.2 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 2 separation roller: 200,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Pull out the tray 2.

2. Remove two screws [1] and the tray 2 separation roller mounting bracket assy [2].

3. Take off the rubber stopper [1], shaft [2], spring [3], and guide plate [4] to remove the tray 2 separation roller fixing bracket assy [5].

4. Snap off the E-ring [1] and the tray 2 separation roller [2].


NOTE• Replace the tray 2 feed roller (standard) and tray 2 separation roller at the same

time.

[1]

[2]

4038F2C002DC

[1]

[5]

[4][2]

[3]

4038F2C003DC

4037F2C509DB

[1]

[2]


15

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.3 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller (bypass)

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 1 feed roller: 200,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Remove the multi bypass unit.

See P.69

2. Snap off the E-ring [1], and remove tray 1 paper feed clutch [2].

3. Remove the gear [1].

4. Snap off the E-ring [1] and remove the bearing [2].

[1]

[2]

4038F2C004DB

[1]

4038F2C005DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C006DC


16

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

5. Snap off two C-ring [1], and remove the bearing [2].

6. Remove the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) [1].


NOTE• Replace the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) and the tray 1 separation roller at the same

time.

[1]

[2]

4038F2C007DC

[1]

4038F2C008DC


16-1

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce


time.• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,

use care not to allow the harness [3] of the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the harness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, result-ing in a machine failure.

4038F2C700AA

[2]

[1]

[3]


17

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.4 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Tray 1 separation roller: 200,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Remove the multi bypass unit.

See P.69

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].

3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2].

4. Snap off the C-clip [1], and remove the spring [2] and the guide plate [3]. Remove the tray 1 separation roller [4].

5. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.NOTE• Replace the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) and the tray 1 separation roller at the same

time.

[1][2]

4038F2C009DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C010DB

4038F2C502DB

[1][3]

[2]

[4]


17-1

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce


time.• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,


4038F2C700AA

[2]

[1]

[3]


18

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.5 Replacing the waste toner bottle

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Waste toner bottle: 18,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Open the front door.

2. Press the waste toner bottle release lever [1].

3. Remove the waste toner bottle [1].NOTE• Raise the waste toner bottle gently

before removing it.• If scattered toner has accumulated

in the vicinity of the toner collecting port, do not tilt the waste toner bot-tle when removing it.

• Do not leave the waste toner bottle in a tilted condition after removing it.

4. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port.See P.90

5. Remove the waste toner bottle from its box, and remove the packing material.

4038F2C541DB

[1]

4038F2C542DB

[1]


19

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6. Set the waste toner bottle [1] in place.

7. Close the front door.NOTE• Replace the dust filter/cooling fan supplied with the waste toner bottle at the same

time.

3.4.6 Replacing the ozone filter

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Ozone filter: 120,000 prints (when the transfer belt unit is replaced)

B. Procedure

1. Holding onto the hook, remove the ozone filter [1].

NOTE• The ozone filter is supplied with the transfer belt unit. Replace it when replacing

the transfer belt unit.

4038F2C543DB

[1]

[1]

4039F2C002DB


20

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.7 Replacing the deodorant filter

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Deodorant filter: 7,500/15,000 prints (when the toner cartridge K is replaced)

B. Procedure

1. Holding onto the hook, take out the deodorant filter [1].

NOTE• The deodorant filter is supplied with the toner cartridge K. Replace it when replac-

ing the toner cartridge K.

3.4.8 Replacing the dust filter/vertical conveyance

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Dust filter/vertical conveyance: 120,000 prints (when the transfer belt unit is replaced)

B. Procedure1. If the duplex option is mounted, remove it.

See P.4 of the duplex option service manual.

2. Remove the dust filter/vertical con-veyance [1].

NOTE• The dust filter/vertical conveyance is supplied with the transfer belt unit.

Replace it when replacing the transfer belt unit.

[1]

4039F2C003DB

[1]

4038F2C020DC


21

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.9 Replacing the dust filter/cooling fan

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Dust filter/cooling fan: 18,000 prints (when the waste toner bottle is replaced)

B. Procedure1. If the dust filter/cooling fan is contaminated by dust or foreign matter, clean it up.

2. Remove the dust filter/cooling fan [1].

NOTE• The dust filter/cooling fan is supplied with the waste toner bottle.

Replace it when replacing the waste toner bottle.

3.4.10 Replacing the transfer roller

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Transfer roller: 120,000 prints (when the transfer belt unit is replaced)

B. Removal procedure1. Turn OFF the main power switch.2. Open the right door.

3. Unlock the lock levers [1] (at two places).

4. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places), remove the transfer roller [2].

[1]4039F2C004DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C021DB


22

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

C. Reinstallation procedure

1. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places), mount the transfer roller [2].

2. Lock the lock levers [1](at two places).

3. Close the right door.

NOTE• Make sure that the door is locked in position both at front and rear.

4. Turn ON the main power switch.

NOTE• The transfer roller is supplied with the transfer belt unit. Replace it when replacing

the transfer belt unit.

3.4.11 Replacing the transfer belt unit

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Transfer belt unit: 120,000 prints

B. Removal procedure1. Open the right door.

2. Remove two screws [1] and release the lock of the transfer belt unit [2].

[1]

[2]

4038F2C022DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C005DB


23

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3. Hold the both sides and lift it to take out the transfer belt unit [1] a little.

4. Hold the position [1] as shown in the left and remove the transfer belt unit [2].

NOTE• Do not touch the surface of the

transfer belt unit.• Cover the transfer belt with some-

thing such shade cloth to protect its surface from dust or foreign matter.


1. Insert the transfer belt unit [1].NOTE• Insert the transfer belt unit with

care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part.

• Do not touch the surface of the transfer belt unit.

• Cover the transfer belt unit with something such shade cloth to pro-tect its surface from dust or foreign matter.

[1]4039F2C006DB

[1]

[2]

[1]

4039F2C007DB

[1]4039F2C008DB


24

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

2. Install the transfer belt unit with two screws [1].

NOTE• Replace the transfer roller, the ozone filter and the dust filter/vertical conveyance,

which are supplied with the transfer belt, at the same time.

3. Close the right door.4. Reinstall the imaging unit and the waste toner bottle.5. Close the front door.6. Turn ON the main power switch.7. Select [QUALITY MENU] → [CALIBRATION] → [TONE CALIBRATION] and carry out

TONE CALIBRATION.

3.4.12 Replacing the toner cartridge Y,M,C,K

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Toner cartridge Y,M,C: 6,000 prints/12,000 prints• Toner cartridge K: 7,500 prints/15,000 prints

B. Removal procedure1. Open the front door.

2. Pressing the toner cartridge lock tab [1], pull it toward.

[1]4039F2C009DB

4038F2C560DB

[1]


25

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3. Pull the toner cartridge [1] toward to remove it.


1. Take out the new toner cartridge [1] from the unitary packing box and shake it well up and down 5 to 10 times.

2. Insert the toner cartridge [1] by fitting it to the groove on the main unit.

NOTE• Make sure the colors are matched

between the toner cartridge and label on the machine.

• Make sure the toner cartridge is inserted all the way.

• When replacing the toner cartridge (black), replace the deodorant filter supplied with it at the same time.

4038F2C538DB

[2]

4038F2C539DB

[1]

4038F2C540DB

[1]


26

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3.4.13 Replacing the imaging unit Y,M,C,K

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Imaging unit Y,M,C: 30,000 prints• Imaging unit K: 50,000 prints

B. Removal procedure1. Turn OFF the main power switch and open the front door.2. Unplug the power cord.

3. Press the unlocking knob [1] of imag-ing unit.

4. Pull out the imaging unit [1], and remove it from main body.

4038F2C531DB

[1]

4038F2C532DB

[1]


27

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce


1. Hold the imaging unit [1] with both hands and tilt it to the left as shown on the illustration. Shake it twice lightly. Tilt it to the right and shake it twice again lightly.

2. Take the imaging unit [1] out from the black plastic bag [2].

3. Peel off the tapes [1] so that the mounting bracket [2] can be removed. Then, remove the mounting bracket [2].

NOTE• Since the imaging unit is highly

susceptible to light, keep it shielded from light up to the time it is installed.

• Carefully unseal the plastic bag (black).

• If the imaging unit is packed in the plastic bag (black) again, seal the package using tape or another means.

4039F2C501DB

[1]

4039F2C502DB

[2]

[1]

4039F2C503DB

[2]

[1]


28

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Remove the caps [1] on the end of the imaging unit and the bottom packing material.

5. Keeping the imaging unit [1] in a level position, insert the imaging unit [1] into the mounting position all the way until it is stopped.

NOTE• Install them by fitting the blue label

position of imaging unit and one of the machine.

• Do not allow the imaging unit to become tilted while installing them into the main body, as damage to the PC drum can result.

6. Pull out the PC drum protective sheet [1] while pressing the imaging unit.

7. Insert the imaging unit all the way.NOTE• Make sure that the imaging unit is

inserted all the way.

8. Plug in the power cord.9. Close the front door.10. Turn ON the main power switch.

4039F2C504DB

[1]

4039F2C505DB

[1]

4039F2C506DB

[1]


29

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

NOTE• When removing / installing the

imaging unit, use care not to touch the surface of the PC drum [1].

3.4.14 Replacing the fusing unit

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Fusing unit: 120,000 prints

B. Removal procedure1. Turn OFF the main power switch and unplug the power cord from the power outlet, then

wait for about 20 minutes.2. Open the front door.

3. Unhook two tabs [1], and remove the exit tray connector protective cover [2].

4039F2C507DC

[1]

CAUTION

• The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit. You may get burned when you come into contact with the area. Before replacement operations, make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the main and sub power switches were turned off.

[1]

[2]

4039F2C010DB


30

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Disconnect the connector [1].

5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector protective cover [2].

6. Disconnect two connectors [1].

7. Open the right cover.8. Open the fusing unit cover.

[1]

4039F2C011DB

[1]

[2]4039F2C012DB

[1]4039F2C013DB


31

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the fusing unit [2].

NOTE• Do not leave the right door open.

[1]

[2]

4039F2C014DB

4. Service tool Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

32

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Service tool

4.1 CE tool list

Tool name Shape Personnel Parts No. Remarks

PH window cleaning jig 1 4038 2083 ##

PH window cleaning jig pad

1 4038 2084 ##

4038F2C557DB

4038F2C558DB

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 4. Service tool

33

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4.2 Print materials

4.2.1 Imaging unit single parts (IU)

See P.12

4.2.2 Toner cartridge single parts (T/C)

Also replace the deodorant filter packed in the T/C black at the same time.

*1: Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90% even with product-to-product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration, when the T/C is used under the conditions of B/W ratio 5% for each color

4.2.3 Waste toner bottle

• Replace the dust filter/cooling fan supplied with the waste toner bottle at the same time.

*1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.See P.12

4.2.4 Maintenance kit

There is no setting for the maintenance Kit.

Parts name Replacing period

Imaging unit K 50,000 prints

Imaging unit Y 30,000 prints

Imaging unit M 30,000 prints

Imaging unit C 30,000 prints

Parts name Replacing period *1

Toner cartridge K 7,500/15,000 prints

Toner cartridge Y 6,000/12,000 prints

Toner cartridge M 6,000/12,000 prints

Toner cartridge C 6,000/12,000 prints

Parts name Replacing period

Waste toner bottle 18,000 prints *1

1

5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

34

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

5. Firmware upgrade

5.1 Checking the current firmware version

1. Call the SERVICE MENU to the display.See P.161

2. Select [FIRMWARE VERSION].

3. Select the firmware to be updated and check the current version.See P.163

5.2 Firmware upgrading procedure by updater

5.2.1 Updating method

• To update the firmware, perform “Firmware Updater.”

A. System requirements

1

4039F2E701DA

FIRMWARE VERSIONCONTROLLER F/WENGINE F/WBOOT F/W

1

Computer

Windows• PC with a Pentium 2,400 MHz or faster processor

(A Pentium 3,500 MHz or faster processor is recommended.)

Macintosh• Apple Macintosh computer with a PowerPC G3 or later proces-

sor (A PowerPC G4 or later is recommended.)• Apple Macintosh computer with an Intel processor

OS

Windows• Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows

2000, Windows Vista Home Basic/Home Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate

Macintosh• MacOS X 10.2 or later

(We recommend installing the newest patch.)

Available hard disk space

Windows • Approximately 20 to 26 MB

Macintosh • Approximately 30 to 42 MB

Memory • 128 MB or more

InterfaceWindows

• 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet• USB 2.0 (High Speed) compliant• Parallel (IEEE 1284)

Macintosh • 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Firmware upgrade

35 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

B. Connection for Windows(1) Starting the firmware updater

NOTE• Before starting the firmware updater, turn on the printer, and make sure that it is

correctly connected.

1. Download the firmware updater.2. Double-click “xxxxxxxxxxxx.exe.”3. The printer name and firmware version are displayed. Click the [Next].

4. The license agreement is displayed. Select “I agree”, and then click the [Next].

4039F2E702DA

4039F2E703DA

1


36

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

5. The list of printer drivers is displayed. Select the appropriate connection for the environ-ment where the printer is being used.

• For a network connection: Select “Network port.”See P.37

• For a local connection: Select “Local port.”See P.39

• When specifying the IP address of the printer: Select “Printer IP address.”See P.41

NOTE• If you select “Network port” or “Local port”, make sure that the printer driver has

been installed.• If you select “Printer IP address”, the firmware can be updated even if a printer

driver is not already installed.

4039F2E704DA


37 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

(2) For a network connection1. When “Network port” is selected, a list of printer drivers for the network port appears.2. Select the printer driver, and then click the [Next].

3. A message appears, requesting confirmation to update the firmware. Click the [Start] to begin transferring the firmware.

NOTE• Do not turn off the printer while its firmware is being updated.

4039F2E705DA

4039F2E706DA

1


38

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. The result of the firmware transfer is displayed. Click the [Exit].

5. If the firmware was successfully updated, the printer will automatically restart.

<If spooling of the data fails>

NOTE• If spooling fails, data may remain in the printer spooler. Delete this data, and then

try again.

1. If spooling of the data fails, the following message appears.2. Click [OK].

4039F2E707DA

4039F2E708DA


39 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3. Check that the printer is ready and that it is correctly connected, and then click the [Update again].

(3) For a local connection1. When “Local port” is selected, a list of printer drivers for the local port appears.2. Select the printer driver, and then click the [Next].

4039F2E709DA

4039F2E710DA

1


40

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce





<If spooling of the data fails>• For details, see “For a network connection.”

See P.38

4039F2E711DA

4039F2E712DA


41 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

(4) When specifying the IP address of the printer1. When “Printer IP address” is selected, the “Printer IP address” box becomes available.2. Type in the IP address, and then click the [Next].



4039F2E713DA

4039F2E714DA

1


42

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce



<If transferring of the data fails>1. If transferring of the data fails, the following message appears.2. Click [OK].

4039F2E715DA

4039F2E716DA


43 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce


C. Connection for Macintosh(1) Starting the firmware updater and the updating procedure

NOTE• Before starting the firmware updater, turn on the printer, and make sure that it is

correctly connected.

1. Download the firmware updater.2. Double-click “xxxxxxxxxxxx.”3. The printer name and firmware version are displayed. Click the [Next].

4039F2E717DA

4039F2E718DA

1


44

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. The license agreement is displayed. Select “I agree”, and then click the [Next].

5. The screen for specifying the IP address of the printer appears.

6. Type in the IP address, and then click the [Next].

4039F2E719DA

4039F2E720DA

4039F2E721DA


45 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce





<If transferring of the data fails>1. If transferring of the data fails, the following message appears.2. Click [OK].

4039F2E722DA

4039F2E723DA

4039F2E724DA

1


46

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce


5.2.2 Checking the version after the firmware update

1. Call the SERVICE MENU to the display.2. Select [FIRMWARE VERSION].

3. Select the firmware that has been updated and check the current version.See P.163

4039F2E725DA

4039F2E701DA

FIRMWARE VERSIONCONTROLLER F/WENGINE F/WBOOT F/W

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 6. Other

47

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6. Other

6.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items

A. Paint-locked screws

NOTE• To prevent loose screws, a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to

the screws.• The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations

and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation.

• If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed, be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened.

B. Red-painted screws

NOTE• The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order

to prevent them from being removed by mistake.• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also

be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a single part, only one repre-sentative screw may be marked with the red paint.

C. Variable resistors on board

NOTE• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions

are given in Adjustment/Setting.

D. Removal of PWBs

CAUTION• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to “Handling of

PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and

screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board.• Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components

on the board, be sure to ground your body.

6. Other Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

48

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)

6.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list

No. Section Part name Ref.Page

1

Exterior parts

Rear left cover P.50

2 Front left cover P.50

3 Upper front cover P.50

4 Rear right cover P.51

5 Rear cover P.51

6 Tray 1 left cover P.51

7 Tray 1 right cover P.51

8 Tray 1 upper cover P.51

9 Front door P.52

10 Exit tray P.52

11 Control panel P.54

12 Tray 2 P.55

13 Front cover P.56

14

Board and etc.

Controller board (PWB-P) P.58

15 Memory (DIMM0) P.59

16 Hard disk kit (option) P.60

17 Mechanical control board (PWB-M) P.60

18 RTC board (PWB-R) P.63

19 DC power supply (PU1) P.64

20 High voltage unit (HV1) P.65

21 Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I) P.66

22 PH interface board (PWB-D) P.67

23

Unit

Multi bypass unit P.69

24 PH unit P.70

25 Transport drive assy P.74

26 Hopper drive assy P.76

27 Right door assy P.78

28

Others

Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) assy P.80

29 Color developing motor (M3) P.80

30 Color PC drum motor (M2) P.81

31 Toner supply motor C/K (M7) P.81

32 Toner supply motor Y/M (M6) P.82

33 Main motor (M1) P.82

34 Fusing drive motor (M4) P.83

35IDC/registration sensor/1(SE1), IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE2)

P.83


49

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.2.2 Cleaning parts list


1 PH PH window P.86

2 Processing section Transfer belt unit P.87

3Tray 2

Tray 2 feed roller (standard) P.87

4 Tray 2 separation roller P.87

5Tray 1

Tray 1 feed roller (bypass) P.88

6 Tray 1 separation roller P.88

7 Conveyance section Registration roller P.89

8 Image transfer section Area around the waste toner collecting port P.90

1


50

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure


The same procedure is applicable to magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.

6.3.1 Rear left cover/front left cover/upper front cover

1. Open the front door [1].2. Open the right door [2].3. Remove two screws [3], and remove the upper front cover [4].4. Remove two screws [5], and remove the rear left cover [6].5. Remove two screws [7], and remove the front left cover [8].

1

[1]

[2]

[3][4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]4039F2C015DB


51

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.2 Rear right cover/rear cover

1. Open the right door [1].2. Remove three screws [2], and remove the rear right cover [3].3. Remove nine screws [4], and remove the rear cover [5].

6.3.3 Tray 1 left cover /tray 1 right cover /tray 1 upper cover

1. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the tray 1 left cover [2].2. Remove the screws [3], and remove the tray 1 right cover [4].3. Remove the tray extension [5].4. Remove two screws [6], and remove the tray 1 upper cover [7].

[1]

[2][3] [4]

[4]

[4]

[5]

4039F2C016DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6] [7] 4039F2C017DB


51-1

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce

NOTE• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1], use care not to allow the harness [3] of

the bypass paper feed clutch to be wedged in the hook [2] of the cover. If the har-ness [3] is wedged, it may be shorted, resulting in a machine failure.

4038F2C700AA

[2]

[1]

[3]


52

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.4 Front Door

1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the screw [1] each to remove the right and left stoppers [2].

3. Pull out the right and left pins [1] to remove the front door [2].

6.3.5 Exit tray

1. Remove the rear left cover, front left cover and rear cover.See P.50

2. Remove the dust filter/cooling fan [1].

[1]

[2]

4038F2C038DC

[1]

[2]

[2]

4038F2C039DB

[1]4039F2C018DB


53

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3. Open the upper fusing cover [1].4. Unhook two tabs [2], and remove the

upper fusing cover [1].

5. Disconnect the connector [1].6. Remove two screws [2], and remove

the exit sensor assy [3].

7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2].

[1]

[2] [2]

4039F2C019DB

[1]

[2]

[3]4039F2C020DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C021DB


54

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.6 Control panel

1. Remove the upper front cover.See P.50

2. Remove two screws [1].

3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].

4. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the control panel [2].

[1]

[1]

4039F2C022DB

[2]

[3]4039F2C023DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C024DB


55

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.7 Tray 2

1. Pull out the tray 2 [1].

2. Loosen the screw [1], hold two tabs [3] and remove the spacer [2].

[1]4039F2C025DB

[2][1]

4038F2C609DB

[3]


56

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3. Pull out the tray 2 [2] while pressing the slide locks [1] at both ends.

6.3.8 Front Cover

1. Remove the front door.See P.52

2. Remove the front left cover, upper front cover and control panel.See P.50, See P.54

3. Remove the toner cartridges Y,M,C,K.See P.24

4. Remove the waste toner bottle.See P.18

5. Remove the imaging units Y,M,C,K.See P.26

NOTE• After the imaging unit has been removed from the main unit wrap it in the light

shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. DO NOT leave the imaging unit exposed to light for a extended period of time as it will become damaged.

6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector protective cover [2].

[1] [2]

[1]

[2]

4037F2C044DC

[1]

[2]4039F2C524DB


57

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce



9. Remove four screws [1].

[1]4039F2C525DB

[1]

4038F2C053DB

[1]

[1]

4039F2C026DB


58

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

10. Unhook six tabs [1], and remove the front cover [2].

6.3.9 Controller board (PWB-P)

1. Remove the rear left cover.See P.50

2. Remove the memory [1].

3. Disconnect all the connectors and flat cables on the controller board.

[1]

[1]

[2]

4039F2C027DB

[1]

4039F2C040DC

4039F2C041DB


59

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Remove three screws [1].

5. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the controller board [2].

NOTE• When the controller board is

replaced, make sure to update the firmware.

6.3.10 Memory (DIMM0)


2. Remove the memory [1].

[1]

4039F2C042DB

[1]

[1]

[2]

4039F2C043DB

[1]

4039F2C040DC


60

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.11 Hard disk kit (Option)


2. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the hard disk [2].

6.3.12 Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

1. Remove the exit tray.See P.52

2. Remove the controller board.See P.58

3. Remove six screws [1], and remove the interface cover [2].

4039F2C509DB

[1]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

4039F2C028DB


61

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the flat cable cover [2].

5. Remove eleven screws [1], and remove the controller board mount-ing bracket [2].

6. Disconnect all the connectors and flat cables on the mechanical control board.

[1]

[2]

4039F2C029DB

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[2]

4039F2C030DB

4039F2C031DB


62

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

7. Remove six screws [1], and remove the mechanical control board [2].

NOTE• When mechanical control board (PWB-M) is replaced, relocate the parameter chip

(IC6). Mount the parameter chip (IC6) of old mechanical control board onto the new mechanical control board.

NOTE• When the parameter chip (IC6) is

mounted, precisely fit the direc-tions of each “A.”

NOTE• When the control board is to be

replaced, rewriting the firmware to the latest one.

[1] [1]

[2]

4039F2C032DB

4037F2C061DC

4037F2C534DB

A

A


63

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

NOTE• When mounting the mechanical

control board, mount it so that the ferrite core [1] will be between two wire saddles. Be careful that the ferrite core [1] will not go over the control board.

6.3.13 RTC board (PWB-R)

1. Remove the controller board mounting bracket.See P.58


3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the RTC board [2].

[1]

4039F2C033DB

[1]4039F2C034DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C035DB


64

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.14 DC power supply (PU1)


2. Remove the control panel.See P.54

3. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness [3] from the edge cover [2].

4. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the protective sheet of DC power supply [2].

5. Disconnect all the connectors on the DC power supply.

[1]

[2]

[3]

4039F2C036DB

[1]

[1]

[1]

[1]

[2]4039F2C037DB

4039F2C038DB


65

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the DC power supply [2].

6.3.15 High voltage unit (HV1)

1. Remove the rear cover.See P.51

2. Disconnect four connectors [1].

3. Remove five screws [1] and the tab [2], and remove the high voltage unit [3].

NOTE• When installing the high voltage

unit, make sure that the terminal end surely contacts.

[1]

[1][2]

4039F2C039DB

[1]

4038F2C085DB

[1] [1]

[2]

[3]

4038F2C086DB


66

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

NOTE• When installing the high voltage

unit, make sure that the claw [1] shown in the left illustration is surely set up.

6.3.16 Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I)

1. Pull out the tray 2.2. Remove the rear cover.

See P.51


the tray 2 paper size board assy [3].

5. Remove the lever [1].6. Remove the tray 2 paper size board

[2].

[1]4038F2C087DB

[1]

[2] [3]

4038F2C088DB

[1][2]

4038F2C516DB


67

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.17 PH interface board (PWB-D)

1. Remove the front cover.See P.56

2. Remove the transfer belt.See P.22

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].

4. Remove seven screws [1], and remove the right door switch assy [2].

5. Remove the screw [1] each, and remove the imaging unit contact assy [2] of each color.

[1][2]

4038F2C097DB

[1][1]

[2]

4038F2C098DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C099DB


68

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6. Remove two screws [1] each, and remove the imaging unit roll assy [2] of each color.

7. Remove all the connectors and the flat cables on the PH interface board.

8. Remove two screws [1] and six tabs [2], and remove the PH interface board [3].

[1]

[2]

4038F2C100DB

4038F2C101DB

[1]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[2]4038F2C102DC


69

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce

6.3.18 Multi bypass unit

1. Remove the tray 1 right cover and the tray 1 left cover.See P.51

2. Disconnect five connectors [1].

3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the multi bypass unit [2].

NOTE1• When installing the multi bypass

unit, fit the position of dowel shown in the left illustration.

[1][1]

4038F2C103DB

[1]

[1]

[2]

4038F2C104DB

4038F2C105DB


69-1

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce

NOTE2• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,


4038F2C700AA

[2]

[1]

[3]


70

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.19 PH unit

A. Removal procedure1. Remove the front cover.

See P.562. Remove the transfer belt.

See P.22

3. Remove the screw [1] and discon-nect the connector [2] respectively, and remove three imaging unit guide rails [3].

4. Disconnect the flat cable [1] and the connector [2] of the PH unit (Black).

5. Unhook the tab [1], and remove the gear [2] of the PH unit (Black).

[1]

[2] [3]4038F2C106DB

[1]

[2]4038F2C107DB

[2]

[1]

4038F2C108DC


71

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6. Remove the stopper [1] of the PH unit (Black).

NOTE• When removing the stopper, use

care so that both ends of the stop-per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left. Keep using the stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles.

7. Remove the PH unit (Black).Move the front side of the PH unit to left a little, and remove the boss [1] from the locating hole [2].Lift up the front side of the PH unit a little.

Remove the boss [1] at the rear side of the PH unit from the locating hole [2].

NOTESince the back of the PH unit is pushed to the right with the two plate springs [3], remove it by tilting the backside of the PH unit to the left as shown in the left illustration.

[1]4039F2E601DB

4038F2C110DB

[1][2]

4037F2C111DC

[1]

[2]

[3]


72

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

Remove the PH unit [1].

8. Follow the same procedures to remove all PH units.

B. Reinstall procedure

1. Fit the back of the PH unit [1] into the plate spring [2] of installation plate.

2. Push the PH unit [1] along the right side line of PH unit installation plate all the way and fit it into the plate spring [2].

3. Make sure that the two bosses [3] at front and rear side of the PH unit fit in the locating hole [4].

4037F2C112DC

[1]

4037F2C113DC

[1]

[2]

4037F2C114DB

[3][4]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]


73

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Reinstall the stopper [1].NOTE• When reinstalling the stopper, use

care so that both ends of the stop-per will not open but stay parallel as shown on the left. Keep using the stopper after once stretched out may cause uneven pitch or other image troubles.

5. Reinstall the gear [1].NOTE• Make sure that the gear claw is fit

in.6. Connect the connector and the flat

cable.NOTE• Make sure the harness is installed

along with the harness guide.7. Follow the same procedures to

install all the PH units.

[1]4039F2E600DB

[1]4038F2C116DB


74

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

8. Install the imaging unit guide rails [1].NOTE• Make sure that the two claws [2] at

rear end of the rail are fit in the locating hole on the main unit.

9. Reinstall the transfer belt.10. Reinstall the front cover.11. Make skew adjustment of the PH unit.

See P.189

NOTE• When replacing the PH unit, make sure to conduct PH unit skew adjustment.

6.3.20 Transport drive assy


2. Remove the high voltage unit.See P.65

3. Remove the color developing motor.See P.80

4. Remove the color PC drum motor.See P.81

5. Remove the main motor.See P.82

6. Remove three screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2] of the right door and spring [3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

4038F2C117DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

4038F2C118DB


75

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

7. Remove the shoulder screw [1].

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].

9. Disconnect the connector [2].10. Remove five screws [1], and remove

the rear handle assy [3].

[1]4038F2C119DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C120DB

[1]

[1] [2]

[3]

[1]

4038F2C121DB


76

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

11. Disconnect the connector [1].12. Remove the harnesses [3] from five

wire saddles [2].

13. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the transport drive assy [2].

NOTE• The screws are fixed at the position

with the triangle markers.

6.3.21 Hopper drive assy

1. Remove the transfer drive assy.See P.74

2. Disconnect seven connectors [1].

[1]

[2]

[2][3]

[3]

4038F2C122DB

[1]

[1][2]

4038F2C123DB

[1]

[1]

[1]

4038F2C124DC


77

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

3. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [1].

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the duct [2].

5. Remove four screws [1].6. Unhook two tabs [2], and remove the

hopper drive assy [3].

[1]4038F2C125DB

[1] [2]

4038F2C126DB

[1]

[1]

[2]

[2]

[3]

4038F2C127DB


78

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.22 Right door assy


2. Remove the high voltage unit.See P.65

3. Open the right door.

4. Remove three screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2] of the right door and spring [3].

5. Remove the shoulder screw [1].

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].

[1]

[2]

[3]

4039F2C510DB

[1]4039F2C511DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C512DB


79

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

7. Disconnect the connector [2].8. Remove five screws [1], and remove

the rear handle assy [3].

9. Disconnect four connectors [1].

10. Remove the front door.See P.52

11. Pull out the tray 1.

12. Remove two screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].

[1]

[1] [2]

[3]

[1]

4039F2C513DB

[1] [1][1]

[1]4039F2C514DB

[2] [1]

[1]4039F2C515DB


80

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

13. Remove the screw [1], and remove the shaft [2].

14. Remove the right door assy [3].

6.3.23 Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) assy



3. Disonnect the connector [1].4. Remove two screws [1], and remove

the cooling fan motor/2 assy [3].

6.3.24 Color developing motor (M3)

1. Remove the cooling fan motor/2 assy.See P.80

2. Disconnect the connector [1].3. Remove four screws [2], and remove

the color developing motor [3].

[1] [3]

[2]4039F2C516DB

[1][2]

[3]4039F2C526DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

4038F2C149DB


81

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.25 Color PC drum motor (M2)



the color PC drum motor [3].

6.3.26 Toner supply motor C/K (M7)



the toner supply motor C/K [3].

[1]

[2][3]

4038F2C150DB

[1]

[3][2]

4038F2C151DB


82

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.27 Toner supply motor Y/M (M6)



the toner supply motor Y/M [3].

6.3.28 Main motor (M1)



the main motor [3].

[2][1]

[3]

4038F2C152DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

4039F2C517DB


83

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.3.29 Fusing drive motor (M4)



the fusing drive motor [3].

6.3.30 IDC/registration sensor/1, IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE1/SE2)


2. Remove the multi bypass unit.See P.69

3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the plate spring [2].

[1]

[2][3]

4039F2C518DB

[1][2]

4038F2C169DB


84

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

4. Remove the shoulder screw [1] and the screw [2].

5. Remove the vertical transport unit [3] in manner of the left illustration.

NOTE• Since multiple connectors are con-

nected to the backside of the verti-cal transport assy, do not pull it by force.

6. Unhook the tabs [1] of both sides, and remove the sensor cover [2].

NOTE• Use care not to miss the spring [3].


the IDC/registration sensor/1 [3].

[3]

[1] [2]

4038F2C170DC

[1]

[2]

[3]

4038F2C171DB

[1][2]

[3]

4038F2C172DB


85

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

9. Repeat the step 6 and 8, and remove the IDC/registration sensor/2 (rear side) [1].

[1]

4038F2C173DB

1


86

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.4 Cleaning procedure


The same procedure is applicable to magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.

6.4.1 PH window

1. Open the front door.

2. Remove the PH window cleaning jig [1].

3. Insert the PH window cleaning jig [1] to the cleaning port [2] and clean it by putting the jig back and forth a couple times.

NOTE• Clean every PH window of CMYK.

1

4038F2C547DB

[1]

4038F2C548DB

[2][1]


87

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.4.2 Transfer belt


2. Using a dried soft cloth, wipe the transfer belt [1].

NOTE• If it is difficult to clean with dried

soft cloth, dampen a soft cloth with a solvent.

• Do not wipe out with water.• When solvent is used to dampen a

cloth, do not use the ones other than shown below: isopropyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, PPC Cleaner, Sol mix AP-7.

6.4.3 Tray 2 feed roller (standard)


2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 feed roller (standard) [1] clean of dirt.

6.4.4 Tray 2 separation roller


2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller mounting bracket assy [2].

[1]

4038F2C174DB

[1]

4038F2C175DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C002DC


88

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce

4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 2 separation roller [1] clean of dirt.

6.4.5 Tray 1 feed roller (bypass)


2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 feed roller (bypass) [1].

NOTE• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,


[1]

4038F2C176DB

[1]

4038F2C177DB

4038F2C700AA

[2]

[1]

[3]


88-1

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce

6.4.6 Tray 1 separation roller


2. Remove the screws [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].

3. Remove the screw [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2].

4. Using the soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the tray 1 separation roller [1].

[1][2]

4038F2C009DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C010DB

[1]

4038F2C178DB


89

mag

icol

or 7

450/

7450

IIM

aint

enan

ce

NOTE• When mounting the Tray1 Right Cover [1] after the multi bypass unit is installed,


6.4.7 Registration roller

1. Open the right door.

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the registration rollers [1] clean of dirt.

4038F2C700AA

[2]

[1]

[3]

[1]

4038F2C017DB


90

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ma

inte

na

nce

6.4.8 Area around the waste toner collecting port

1. Remove the waste toner bottle.See P.18

2. Wipe the areas around the waste toner collecting port [1] clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alco-hol.

[1]

4039F2C001DA

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 7. How to Use the adjustment section

91

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

Adjustment/Setting7. How to Use the adjustment section• This section contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for

this machine.• Throughout this section the default settings are indicated by “ ”.

Advance checksBefore attempting to solve the customer’s problem, the following advance checks must be made:

• Does the power supply voltage meet the specifications?• Is the power supply is properly grounded?• Does the machine share a power supply with any other machine that draws a large cur-

rent intermittently (for example, an elevator or air conditioner that generates electrical noise)?

• Is the installation site level and environmentally appropriate (for example, away from high temperatures, high humidity, direct sunlight, direct ventilation, etc.?

• Does the original have a problem that may cause a defective image?• Is the density properly selected?• Is the correct media being used for printing?• Are the units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) properly

replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life?• Is there an adequate supply of toner in the toner cartridges?

CAUTION• Unplug the machine’s power cord before starting a service job procedure.• Use special care when handling the fusing unit, which can be extremely hot.• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring

instruments away from it.• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.• Do not touch IC pins with your bare hands.

8. Description of the control panel Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

92

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8. Description of the control panel

8.1 Control panel display

8.1.1 Parts of the control panel display

• The following shows the names of each part of the control panel. These names are used throughout this manual.From the top, the panel is divided into LCD 1, LCD 2, LCD 3, and LCD 4.

• LCD 4 may display a message instructing you to press a key on the control panel. When you press that key, the displayed message changes.

NOTE• The display screen is not designed for touch panel operation; therefore, do not

touch the icons on the screen. If it is pushed too hard, the LCD (Liquid Crystal Dis-play) may be damaged.

4039F3E501DB

READY

for help YMCK

TONER LOW M

LCD 1

LCD 2

LCD 3

Up key

Menu key

Right keyDown key

Left key

Cancel key

LCD 4

READY display

ERROR display

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 8. Description of the control panel

93

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.1.2 Message structure

• There are five types of messages.

Message Description

Normal messages These messages are displayed after warmup has been completed:• Toner remaining gauge• Data-receiving message• Printing message• Firmware update messages• Warnings

Menu messages These messages are displayed after the MENU key is pressed.

Operator call messages These messages are displayed when minor error(s) that can be handled by users occur.

Service call messages These messages are displayed when error(s) that cannot be handled by users occur.

Help messages These messages are displayed when the down key is pressed when a nor-mal message/warning or operator call message is displayed.

Normal message Menu message Operator call message

Service call message Help message

4138F3E002DB

READY

to enter YMCK

4138F3E003DB

MENUPROOF/PRINT MENUPRINT MENUPAPER MENU

4138F3E004DB

TONER EMPTY

for help YMCK

REPLACE M

4039F3E517DB

SERVICE CALL C002RAM ERROR

4138F3E006DB

? PREPARE NEW WASTE TONER BOTTLE


94

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.1.3 Normal messages

• The basic screen is displayed after warm-up has been completed.• The “READY LED ” lights up while the message is displayed.

A. Toner-remaining level gauge• The amount of each color of toner remaining is graphed in 10% increments (11 scales.)

However, it’s not displayed during the following states:- Operator call- Service call- Menu- Help menu- BOOT message- When the toner remaining amount is not determined immediately after start-up.

Display Description

LCD 1 Printer mode is displayed. (Normally, [READY] is displayed.)

LCD 2 The message is displayed. (Normally, no message is displayed.)

LCD 3

LCD 4 Key guidance is displayed.• Normally [MENU to enter] is displayed.

When the MENU key is pressed, the panel displays the MENU screen.• When a WARNING message is displayed, [ for help] is also displayed.

When the down key is pressed, the panel displays the HELP screen.

4138F3E007DB

YMCK

READY

to enter YMCK

State

Message

Key guidance

Toner-remaining level gauge

Toner-remaining amount 100% (Full)

Toner-remaining amount 0% (Empty)

Toner color display


95

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

B. Data receiving message/print• The control panel displays the following description at data receiving message/print.

Display Description

LCD 1 Printer mode is displayed (for example, PRINTING).• PROCESSING is displayed during data receiving or printer startup.• PRINTING is displayed during printing.• When printing in sets, [COPYING] is displayed after the second set starts printing.

• The normal printing data-receiving icon “ ” is displayed on the right during data receiving.

• The Camera-Direct connecting icon “ ” is displayed on the right when the digital camera is connected to the machine.

• The Camera-Direct printing data-receiving icon “ ” is displayed on the right during data receiving.

LCD 2 Job information is displayed (for example, 1 AKIRA KUROSAWA).• The job owner name, etc. set with PJL commands is displayed.• When multiple jobs are set, the number is displayed to the left of the owner name.

LCD 3 Job progress is displayed (for example, 1/7 page).• In normal print mode, number of processed print/total number of print is displayed.• When printing in sets, number of processed print/total number of a set print is displayed

while the first set is copying. After the second set starts printing, the LCD 1 state is changed to COPYING and number of processed print /total number of print is displayed.

LCD 4 Scroll bar is displayed.• When multiple jobs are sent, a scroll bar is displayed.• By pressing the left key /right key , the jobs waiting to be printed are displayed.

The following example shows the scroll bar in the case of two jobs. By pressing the right key, the panel displays the job waiting to be printed. To return to the display of the job cur-rently processing, press the left key.

State

Job information

Scroll bar

Data-receiving icon

Left keyRight key

Print-waiting job

Progress

4138F3E010DB

PRINTING 1 AKIRA KUROSAWA

1/ 7 pageYMCK

4138F3E011DB

PRINTING 2 TAKESHI KITANO

0/ 1 pageYMCK


96

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

C. Firmware update• The control panel displays the following description at firmware update.

D. Warning• This message is displayed when the print is available but some user manipulation(s) are

required. The control panel displays the following description for warning.

Display Description

LCD 1 FIRMWARE UPDATE is displayed.

LCD 2 LCD 2 displays the type of firmware (for example, SYSTEM).• SYSTEM: Controller firmware• BOOT: Boot firmware• RESOURCE: Resource file• CONFIGURATION: Equipment configuration file• ENGINE: Engine firmware

LCD 3 Progress of the update is displayed (for example, 90%).

LCD 4 No display

Firmware update

Type of firmware

Progress

4138F3E012DB

FIRMWARE UPDATE

YMCK

SYSTEM 90%

Display Description

LCD 1 Print mode is displayed and warning icon is displayed on the right (for example, READY).

LCD 2 Warning message is displayed (for example, TONER LOW M).

LCD 3

LCD 4 Key guidance is displayed (for example, for help: By pressing the down key , the screen displays the help screen).

State

Warning message

Key guidance

Warning icon

4138F3E013DB

READY

for help YMCK

TONER LOW M


97

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

E. Job cancellation• By pressing the CANCEL key after the job is sent, the control panel displays the job can-

cel menu.• When no job is has been sent, pressing the CANCEL key has no effect.• The control panel displays the following description at the job cancel menu.

• By pressing the up key /down key , the item can be selected.• The selected item is displayed with highlighted text. The default setting is CONTINUE.• By pressing the MENU key, the selected item is entered.• By pressing the CANCEL key, the job cancel menu is closed.

• By selecting CURRENT JOB or ALL JOB and pressing the MENU key, job cancellation is implemented.

Display Description

LCD 1 CANCEL JOB is displayed.

LCD 2 CONTINUE is displayed.• Function: Continue the print of currently processing job.

LCD 3 CURRENT JOB is displayed.• Function: Stop the print of currently processing job.

LCD 4 ALL JOBS is displayed• Stop the printing of all jobs, including the job currently being processed and all jobs waiting

to be printed.

Job cancellation

Cancelled Job items

4138F3E014DB

CANCEL JOBCONTINUECURRENT JOBALL JOBS

Canceling job

Key guidance

4138F3E015DB

CANCELING JOB

to enter YMCK


98

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.1.4 Menu

• The Menu is displayed when the MENU key is pressed.• The control panel displays the following description at the Menu screen.

• For the details of each item, see “Menu.”See P.110

Display Description

LCD 1 Menu items that are above this will be displayed.

LCD 2 Menu items are displayed (3 items/ 7 items).• By pressing the up key /down key , the item is selected.• The Menu consists of the following 7 items:

- PROOF/ PRINT MENU- PRINT MENU- PAPER MENU- QUALITY MENU- CAMERA DIRECT- INTERFACE MENU- SYS DEFAULT MENU- MAINTENANCE MENU- SERVICE MENU

LCD 3

LCD 4

Menu

Menu items

Scroll bar

Down key

Up key

4138F3E003DB

MENUPROOF/PRINT MENUPRINT MENUPAPER MENU


99

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.1.5 Operator call messages

• These messages are displayed when minor error(s) that can be handled by user occur.• The “Error LED ” lights while the message is displayed on the control panel.• The “Ready LED ” on control panel turns OFF during operator call.• The control panel displays the following when an operator call message is displayed.

• In the case of an operator call message related to a toner cartridge, the toner-remaining level gauge is displayed, and the gauge of the appropriate color flashes (for example, the M gauge).

• In the case of an operator call message for another reason, the printer icon is displayed with a flashing “warning icon .”

• For the details of each item, see “Operator call messages.”See P.104

Display Description

LCD 1 A warning icon “ ” is displayed and the state is displayed on the right (for example, TONER EMPTY).

LCD 2 Message is displayed (for example, REPLACE M).

LCD 3

LCD 4 “ for help” is displayed.• By pressing the down key, the panel displays the help screen.

State

Warning message

Key guidance

Warning icon

Toner-remaining level gauge

Printer icon

Warning icon

4138F3E004DB

TONER EMPTY

for help YMCK

REPLACE M

4039F3E518DB

WASTE TONER FULL

for help

REPLACE BOTTLE


100

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.1.6 Service call messages

• These messages are displayed when error(s) that cannot be handled by the user occur.• The “Error LED ” turns ON while the message is displayed on the control panel.• The “Ready LED ” on control panel turns OFF while an service call message is dis-

played on the control panel.• The control panel displays the following description at service call.

• A printer icon is displayed with a flashing “warning icon .”• A service call detected during start-up of the printer is displayed as shown in the bottom

of the following picture.

• For the details of each item, see “Service call messages.”See P.107

Display Description

LCD 1 A “warning icon ” is displayed and the service call message and a 4-digit-service call ID are displayed on the right (for example, SERVICE CALL C002).

LCD 2 The error description is displayed (for example, RAM ERROR).

LCD 3

LCD 4 No display

State

Error message

Warning icon

Printer icon

Warning icon

State

Error message

4039F3E517DB


4138F3E019DB



101

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.1.7 Help screen

• This screen is displayed when the down key is pressed when a normal message/warn-ing or operator call message is displayed.

• The control panel displays the following description at the help screen.

• A graphic is displayed if necessary.

Display Description

LCD 1 A “question icon ” is displayed and the necessary information is displayed on the right (for example, PREPARE NEW WASTE TONER BOTTLE).LCD 2

LCD 3

LCD 4 A scroll bar or “ to exit” message is displayed.• If there are several messages, a scroll bar is displayed.• By pressing the left key /right key , a previous/next screen message is displayed.• If all messages are displayed, “ to exit” displays on the screen.

?

4138F3E006DB

? PREPARE NEW WASTE TONER BOTTLE

Key guidance

Question icon

Scroll bar

Left keyRight key

4138F3E020DB

? WASTE TONER BOTTLE P/N XXXXXXX-XXX

to exit

Necessary information


102

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.2 List of control panel messages

NOTE• When two or more messages are to be displayed, the message with the higher pri-

ority will be displayed.• When a message concerning consumables/periodic replacement parts (units) is

displayed, print a statistics page from the [PRINT MENU] → [STATISTICS] menu and check the status of the other consumables, too.

See P.115

8.2.1 Normal messages

A. Normal messages

Message (LCD1) Description

INITIALIZING • The printer is being initialized

READY • Print enabled (Data not being printed)

ENERGY SAVER • Machine in energy saver mode

PROCESSING • Print data processing (Data receiving - printer is started)

PRINTING • Data being printed (Printer is started)

COPYING • Data being printed in sets

WARMING UP • During warmup

CALIBRATING • Color shift correction in progress

CANCELING JOB • Job canceled

REBOOTING • The printer is restarting

FIRMWARE UPDATE • The printer’s firmware is being upgraded


103

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

B. Warning messages

PriorityMessage

(LCD2/LCD3)Description

High 1 UNABLE TOCOLLATE JOB

Print in sets disabled (Full hard disk)(This warning message is also displayed during printing.)

2 HDDNEAR FULL

The hard disk space will run out soon.

3 MEMORY CARDNEAR FULL

The compact flash space will run out soon.

4 I-UNIT ENDX

Service life of the imaging unit (X) has been reached. (END status)• Executing the color printing with one of YMCK being at the END will

make the operator call.

5 TONER EMPTYX

Toner (X) is empty.• Executing the color printing with one of YMCK being empty will

make the operator call.

6 I-UNIT LIFEX

Service life of the imaging unit has been reached.• Printing is available until the END status when the [IMAGING UNIT

LIFE] is set to [CONTINUE] on MENU.When it is set to [STOP], executing the color printing with one of YMCK having been reached its service life will make the operator call.

• Monochrome printing is available unless the imaging unit K reached its service life. (but not under warranty)

7 TRANS. BELTEND OF LIFE

Transfer belt unit service life has been reached.

8 FUSER UNITEND OF LIFE

Fusing unit service life has been reached.

9 WASTE TONERNEAR FULL

The waste toner bottle needs replacement soon.

10 TONER LOWX

The specified color toner cartridge will run out soon.

11 I-UNIT LOWX

The specified color imaging unit will run out soon.

12 UNKNOWN PAPERTRAY X

Media which size cannot be automatically detected has been inserted.

13 PAPER EMPTYTRAY X

No media in the specified tray.The specified tray is not installed, but it is set in the printer driver.

14 INCORRECTTONER X

The specified color toner cartridge is not the correct type.A print cycle can be initiated, but is run at 1/3 the normal print speed.

15 INCORRECTI-UNIT X

The specified color imaging unit is not the correct type.

16 ILLEGALINSTALLATION

The compact flash card has been inserted into the card slot after ini-tialization is completed. The compact flash card will be invalid.

17 NON SUPPORTCARD

A compact flash card which is inserted is not supported.The compact flash card will be invalid.

18 INCORRECTHDD

A hard disk which was formatted by other unit is installed.

19 INCORRECTMEMORY CARD

A compact flash card which was formatted by other unit is installed.

1


104

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

*: magicolor 7450 II only

8.2.2 Operator call messages

20 HUBSNOT SUPPORTED *

A USB hub is connected to the USB host I/F.

Low 21 DEVICENOT SUPPORTED *

An unsupported device is connected to the USB host I/F.

PriorityMessage

(LCD2/LCD3)Description

1

1

PriorityMessage

DescriptionLCD1 LCD2/LCD3

High 1 COVER OPEN FRONT COVER

The front door of the machine is open.

SIDE COVER The right door of the machine is open.

DUPLEX COVER

The duplex option door is open.

TRAY3 COVER The right cover of tray 3 is open.



2 PAPER JAM FUSER/EXIT A media jam has occurred at the fusing section.

SECOND TRANS

A media jam has occurred at the decond transfer sec-tion.

VERTICAL TRANS

A media jam has occurred at the vertical conveyance.

DUPLEX1 A media jam has occurred at the duplex media feed sec-tion of the duplex option.

DUPLEX2 A media jam has occurred at the duplex transport sec-tion of the duplex option.

TRAY1 A media jam has occurred at tray 1 (manual feed tray).

TRAY2 A media jam has occurred at tray 2.




3 I-UNIT MISSING CHECK X The specified color imaging unit is not installed.

4 TONER MISSING CHECK X The specified color toner cartridge is not installed.

5 NO WASTE BOTTLE

⎯ The waste toner bottle is not installed.

6 TRANS. BELT LIFE

REPLACE TRANS. BELT

Transfer belt unit service life has been reached.

7 FUSER UNIT LIFE

REPLACE FUSER UNIT

Fusing unit service life has been reached.

8 WASTE TONER FULL

REPLACE BOTTLE

The waste toner bottle is full.


105

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9 I-UNIT END REPLACE Y

The specified color imaging unit has reached its life.• This message will be displayed when performing the

color printing while the [IMAGING UNIT LIFE] is set to [CONTINUE] on MENU, and warning message [I-UNIT END] is being displayed.

REPLACE M

REPLACE C

REPLACE K

10 TONER EMPTY REPLACE Y

The specified color toner cartridge has run out.

REPLACE M

REPLACE C

REPLACE K

11 I-UNIT LIFE REPLACE Y

Service life of the imaging unit has been reached.• This message will be displayed when performing the

color printing while the [IMAGING UNIT LIFE] is set to [STOP] on MENU, and warning message [I-UNIT LIFE] is being displayed.

• Monochrome printing is available unless the Imaging Unit K is at the END. (but not under warranty)

REPLACE M

REPLACE C

REPLACE K

12 TRAYX SIZE ERR ADDSSSS *

The media size set in the printer driver does not match that of the media loaded in the specified tray.• Load “SSSS” size media in the specified tray.

13 TRAYX TYPE ERROR

ADDTTTT *

The media size set in the printer driver does not match that of the media loaded in the specified tray.• Load “TTTT” type media in the specified tray.

14 MANUAL FEED SSSS *TTTT *

• During print start-up, media has been loaded in multi bypass tray and is waiting for a print start command.After the user confirms the media and gives the print start command, printing starts.

How to start printing:1. Press the up key.2. Press the down key, select tray with help menu and

press the MENU key.3. Set the media loaded in the tray 1 again.

15 PAPER EMPTY SSSS *TTTT *

• No specified media in trays 1 to 5.• Tray 3/4 is loaded with the specified media but is not

set appropriately.• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [ON].

TRAYX EMPTY SSSS *TTTT *

• No specified media in the specified tray or tray 3/4 is not set appropriately.

• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [OFF].

PriorityMessage



106

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

* SSSS represents the media size while TTTT shows the media type.

16 PAPER ERROR SSSS *TTTT *

• The size and type of media specified in the driver is not loaded in any tray.

• A different size of media from the one specified in the driver is loaded in the tray at media feeding.

• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [ON].

TRAYX PAPER ERR

SSSS *TTTT *

• The size and type of media specified in the driver is not loaded in the specified tray.

• A different size of media from the one specified in the driver is loaded in the specified tray at media feeding.

• Displays when [TRAY CHAINING] is set to [OFF].

17 OUTPUT FULL REMOVE PAPER

The printed media volume has reached maximum capacity in the exit tray.

18 MEMORY FULL PRESS CANCEL

The volume of data to be printed exceeds the permissi-ble amount of data to be processed by the machine’s memory.

19 HOLD JOB ERROR

UNABLE TOSTORE JOB

The specified data of the held job is being received, but an optional HDD is not installed.

PriorityMessage



107

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

8.2.3 Service call messages

• For troubleshooting procedures, see “Troubleshooting.”See P.202

Message

DescriptionLCD1(Service Call ID)

LCD2/LCD3(Error description)

0001 M MOTOR 2 Main motor’s turning at abnormal timing

0018 P MOTOR COLOR 1 Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn

0019 P MOTOR COLOR 2 Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing

001A D MOTOR COLOR 1 Color developing motor’s failure to turn

001B D MOTOR COLOR Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing

0040 SUCTION FAN Suction fan motor’s failure to turn

0043 INSIDE FAN 1 Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn

0046 FUSER FAN Fusing cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn

0048 FUSER COVER FAN Fusing cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn

004C OZONE FAN Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn

004E POWER FAN Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn

004F INSIDE FAN 2 Cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn

0094 XFER DETACH2 2nd image transfer roller separation

0096 XFER DETACH1 Transfer belt separation

0301 POLYGON MOTOR C Polygon motor/C failure to turn

0302 POLYGON MOTOR M Polygon motor/M failure to turn

0303 POLYGON MOTOR Y Polygon motor/Y failure to turn

0304 POLYGON MOTOR K Polygon motor/K failure to turn

0311 LASER ERROR C Laser malfunction (cyan)

0312 LASER ERROR M Laser malfunction (magenta)

0313 LASER ERROR Y Laser malfunction (yellow)

0314 LASER ERROR K Laser malfunction (black)

0500 FUSER ERROR Heating roller warm-up failure

0501 FUSER ERROR Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure

0510 FUSER ERROR Abnormally low heating roller temperature

0511 FUSER ERROR Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature

0520 FUSER ERROR Abnormally high heating roller temperature

0521 FUSER ERROR Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature

0900 TRAY4 LIFT Tray 4 elevator failure



0960 TRAY1 SENSOR Manual tray rise descent error

0F30 DENSITY LOW C Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor

0F31 DENSITY HIGH C Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor

0F32 DENSITY LOW M Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor

0F33 DENSITY HIGH M Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor


108

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

0F34 DENSITY LOW Y Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor

0F35 DENSITY HIGH Y Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor

0F36 DENSITY LOW K Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor

0F37 DENSITY HIGH K Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor

0F3A TCR SENSOR C Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure

0F3B TCR SENSOR M Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure

0F3C TCR SENSOR Y Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure

0F3D TCR SENSOR K Black TCR sensor adjustment failure

13B0 RTC ERROR RTC failure

13C8 TRANS. CLEAR Transfer unit new article release

13CA FUSER CLEAR Fusing unit new article release

13D0 EEPROM1 Trouble related to security

13D1 EEPROM PU C Cyan print unit EEPROM access error

13D2 EEPROM PU M Magenta print unit EEPROM access error

13D3 EEPROM PU Y Yellow print unit EEPROM access error

13D4 EEPROM PU K Black print unit EEPROM access error

13D9 EEPROM TC C Cyan toner cartridge EEPROM access error

13DA EEPROM TC M Magenta toner cartridge EEPROM access error

13DB EEPROM TC Y Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error

13DC EEPROM TC K Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error

13E2 FLASH WRITE Flash ROM write error

3000 M MOTOR 1 Main motor’s failure to turn

C002 RAM ERROR RAM (standard) error at start-up

C003 RAM ERROR RAM (option) error at start-up

C013 H/W ADDRESS MAC address error at startup (MAC address is invalid)

C015 BOOT ROM Boot ROM error at startup

C022 NVRAM ERROR NVRAM access error

C025, C026, C027

CONTROLLER ROM Controller ROM error

C050 HDD ERROR HDD access error

C051 *1 HDD DISK FULL HDD full error

C052 CARD ERROR Compact flash access error

C053 *1 CARD FULL Compact flash full error

C054 CARD ERROR Compact flash uninstallation

C060 UPDATE ERROR Firmware update error

C061 HOLD JOB ERRORDUPLEX

Hold job error/no duplex unit

C062 HOLD JOB ERRORTRAY3

Hold job error/no tray 3



Message




109

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

*1: After a trouble occurred, an automatic format will be carried out when restarting the printer.

8.3 Cancelling a print job

• A print job being processed or printed can be cancelled by pressing the CANCEL key.• When no job has been sent, pressing the CANCEL key has no effect.

1. If the CANCEL key is pressed while a print job is being printed, a message appears on the control panel.

2. Select the job to be cancelled using the up key / down key and press the MENU/SELECT key.By pressing the CANCEL key, the job cancel menu is closed.

C064 HOLD JOB ERRORMEMORY

Hold job error/no memory



FFFF I/F COMM ERROR Interface communication error

Message



Panel Display(LCD2-LCD4)

Description

CONTINUE Continue printing the currently processing job.

CURRENT JOB Stop printing the currently processing job.

ALL JOB Stop printing all jobs, including the currently processing job and all jobs waiting to be printed.

Job cancellation

Cancelled Job items

4138F3E014DB

CANCEL JOBCONTINUECURRENT JOBALL JOBS

9. Menu Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

110

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9. Menu

9.1 List of Menu functions

Menu Ref. Page

PROOF/PRINT MENU *1 P.114

PRINT MENU CONFIGURATION PG P.114

DEMO PAGE P.115

STATISTICS PAGE P.115

FONT LIST POSTSCRIPT P.118

PCL P.118

MENU MAP P.119

DIRECTORY LIST *1 P.119

PAPER MENU PAPER SOURCE

DEFAULT TRAY P.119

TRAY1 P.119

TRAY2 P.121

TRAY3 P.122

TRAY4

TRAY5

TRAY CHAINING P.123

TRAY MAPPING P.123

DUPLEX *2 P.123

COPIES P.124

COLLATE *1 P.124

QUALITY MENU COLOR MODE P.124

BRIGHTNESS P.124

PCL SETTING CONTRAST P.125

IMAGE PRINTING

RGB SOURCE P.125

RGB INTENT P.125

RGB GRAY P.125

HALFTONE P.126

TEXT PRINTING

RGB SOURCE P.126

RGB INTENT P.126

RGB GRAY P.126

HALFTONE P.127

GRAPHICS PRINTING P.127

PS SETTING IMAGE PRINTING

RGB SOURCE P.127

RGB INTENT P.127

RGB GRAY P.128

DESTINATION PROF P.128

HALFTONE P.128

TEXT PRINTING

RGB SOURCE P.128

RGB INTENT P.129

RGB GRAY P.129

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 9. Menu

111 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

QUALITY MENU PS SETTING TEXT PRINTING


HALFTONE P.129

GRAPHICS PRINTING

RGB SOURCE P.130

RGB INTENT P.130

RGB GRAY P.130


HALFTONE P.131

SIMULATION SIMULATION PROF P.131

SIMULATION INTENT P.131

CMYK GRAY P.131

IMAGE CMYK GRAY *6 P.131

CALIBRATION TONE CALIBRATION P.132

AIDC PROCESS P.132

CMYK DENSITY CYAN P.132

MAGENTA P.132

YELLOW P.132

BLACK P.133

COLOR SEPARATION P.133

THIN LINE MODE *6 P.133

CAMERA DIRECT *3

PAPER SOURCE P.133

LAYOUT P.134

PAPER MARGIN P.134

IMAGE QUALITY

BRIGHTNESS P.134

CONTRAST P.134

RGB SOURCE P.134

RGB INTENT P.135

RGB GRAY P.135

HALFTONE P.135

INTERFACE MENU

JOB TIMEOUT P.135

ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE P.136

IP ADDRESS P.136

SUBNET MASK P.136

DEFAULT GATEWAY P.137

DHCP/BOOTP P.137

TELNET P.137

NETWARE ENABLE P.137

APPLETALK ENABLE P.138

SPEED/DUPLEX P.138

CAMERA DIRECT P.138

Menu Ref. Page

1

1


112

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

SYS DEFAULT MENU

LANGUAGE P.138

EMULATION DEF. EMULATION P.139

POSTSCRIPT WAIT TIMEOUT P.139

PS ERROR PAGE P.139

PS PROTOCOL P.139

PCL CR/LF MAPPING P.139

LINES PER PAGE P.140

FONT SOURCE FONT NUMBER P.140

PITCH SIZEP.140

(POINT SIZE)

SYMBOL SET P.141

PAPER DEFAULT PAPER

PAPER SIZE P.141

CUSTOM SIZE P.142

PAPER TYPE P.142

DETECT PAPER SIZE P.142

UNIT OF MEASURE P.143

STARTUP OPTIONS

DO STARTUP PAGEP.143

AUTO CONTINUE P.143

HOLD JOB TIMEOUT *1 P.143

ENERGY SAVER P.144

ENERGY SAVER TIME *4 P.144

MENU TIMEOUT P.144

LCD BRIGHTNESS P.144

SECURITY CHANGE PASSWORD P.145

LOCK PANEL P.145

CLOCK DATE P.146

TIME P.146

HDD FORMAT *1

USER AREA ONLYP.146

ALL

CARD FORMAT *5 P.147

RESTORE DEFAULTS

RESTORE NETWORK

P.147RESTORE PRINTER

RESTORE ALL

ENABLE WARNING

PAPER EMPTY P.153

TONER LOW P.154

I-UNIT LOW P.154

IMAGING UNIT LIFE P.154

Menu Ref. Page


113 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

*1: It is displayed only when the optional hard disk kit is mounted.*2: It is displayed only when the optional duplex unit is installed.*3: It is displayed only when INTERFACE MENU/CAMERA DIRECT is set to “ENABLE.”*4: It is displayed only when the [ENERGY SAVER] setting is set besides “OFF.”*5: It is displayed only when the optional Compact Flash is mounted.*6: magicolor 7450 II only

MAINTENANCE MENU

PRINT MENU EVENT LOG P.155

HALFTONE 64 P.155

HALFTONE 128 P.155

HALFTONE 256 P.156

GRADATION P.156

ALIGNMENT TOP ADJUSTMENT P.156

LEFT ADJUSTMENT P.156

LEFT ADJ DUPLEX P.157

TRANSFER POWER

SIMPLEX PASS P.157

DUPLEX PASS P.158

IMG ADJ THICK P.158

IMG ADJ BLACK P.158

FUSER LOOP ADJ P.159

Menu Ref. Page

1


114

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.2 PROOF/PRINT MENU

9.3 PRINT MENU

9.3.1 CONFIGURATION PG

Function • Selects and prints the job held temporarily in the printer.• Selects and deletes the job held temporarily in the printer.

NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.

Use • To proof one copy of a print job before printing the rest of the copies.

Setting/procedure

How to print the held job

1. Select [PROOF/PRINT MENU] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select user name and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired print job and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.5. If the hold job is set as PRIVATE JOB, enter the pin number (Personal Identification

Number) with the up key /down key .6. Set “Print number” with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT key.

NOTE• The held job cannot be printed until the correct pin number is entered at the

printer control panel.• The held job is deleted automatically after the period of time specified in the

“SYSTEM DEFAULT MENU/HOLD JOB TIMEOUT” menu.

How to delete the held job

1. Select [PROOF/PRINT MENU] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select user name and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired print job and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. Select [DELETE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.5. If the held job is set as PRIVATE JOB, enter the pin number (Personal Identification

Number) with the up key /down key .6. Select [YES] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

NOTE• The held job cannot be deleted until the correct pin number is entered.

Function • Prints a configuration page.

Use • To check the configuration of the machine. The following items can be checked:Printer informationOptionsINTERFACE MENUPAPER MENUSYS DEFAULT MENUQUALITY MENUCAMERA DIRECT

Setting/procedure

• Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.


115 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.3.2 DEMO PAGE

9.3.3 STATISTICS PAGE

Function • Prints a demo page.

Use • To prints a demo page.

Setting/procedure


Function • Prints a dtatistics page.

Use • To check consumable status and the usage of the machine. The following items can be checked:

Supplies/parts statusPage informationCoverage information

Setting/procedure


1

1


116

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

A. Sample of STATISTICS PAGE1

SUPPLIES/PARTS STATUS

PAGE INFORMATION

COVERAGE INFORMATION

Total Count

Total Count(Duplex)

Total Count(Normalized)

SERIAL NUMBER: *************

Cyan Toner Cartridge

DATE : 07.04.2008

TIME : 03:07

0 25 50 75 100 Percent Remaining

Monochrome

<Latest Job>

Normalized Coverage Information

Average % Y :

Average % M :

Average % C :

Average % K :

0.9

0.3

2.7

3.5

0.6

0.6

1.3

5.8

<Total>

Average % Y :

Average % M :

Average % C :

Average % K :

A3WIDE

A3

11x17

B4(JIS)

LEGAL

LETTER

A4

B5(JIS)

A5

CUSTOM

OTHERS

0

1

0

3

0

0

14

0

6

0

0

Sheets Printed by PaperSize

PLAIN PAPER

RECYCLED

THICK 1

THICK 2

THICK 3

LABEL

TRANSPARENCY

TRANSPARENCY2

ENVELOPE

POSTCARD

LETTERHEAD

GLOSSY

20

0

4

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Sheets Printed by PaperType

8

Monochrome 2

Monochrome 8

Full Color 12

Full Color 0

Full Color 11

Total 20

Total 2

Total 19

82% Starter

Cartridge Type

Product Name : magicolor7450

Printer Name : MC7450-XXXXX

Magenta Toner Cartridge87% Starter

Yellow Toner Cartridge93% Starter

Black Toner Cartridge88% Starter

Cyan Imaging Unit97%

Magenta Imaging Unit97%

Yellow Imaging Unit97%

Black Imaging Unit97%

99%

98%

Transfer Belt

Fuser Unit

Waste Toner Bottle Ready

4039F3C601DA


117 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

B. SUPPLIES/PARTS STATUS• Display the estimated percent of life remaining in the toner cartridge, imaging unit, trans-

fer belt and fuser unit.The type of the toner cartridges that are installed in the printer is also displayed. (See the table below)

• Display the status of the waste toner bottle.

NOTE• The percent of life remaining can be used as a guide, but may not exactly reflect

the amount that has been used in the supplies.

C. Counter Information• The total number of pages that have been printed is counted and displayed based on the

description shown in the following table.

<Counter information list>

Types of toner cartridges

Starter• Toner cartridge included with a product shipped

from the factory: 3,000-print

Standard• Standard-capacity toner cartridge:

6,000 (Y,M,C)/7,500 (K)-print

High• High-capacity toner cartridge:

12,000 (Y,M,C)/15,000 (K)-print

Types of count Contents Count timing

Total Count Monochrome • The total number of monochrome pages ejected from the printer.Increment by one per simplex and by two per duplex

When a sheet of media is ejected

properly

Full color • The total number of color pages ejected from the printer. Increment by one per simplex and by two per duplex

Total Count (duplex)

Monochrome • The total number of monochrome duplex sheets ejected from the printer. Increment by one per duplex (and by zero per sim-plex)

Full color • The total number of color duplex sheets ejected from the printer. Increment by one per duplex (and by zero per sim-plex)

Total Count (Normalized)

Monochrome • The total number of monochrome pages on a A4 basis that have been ejected from the printer. Increment by 100 per A4 simplex and by 200 per A4 duplex *1

Full color • The total number of color pages on a A4 basis that have been ejected from the printer. Increment by 100 per A4 simplex and by 200 per A4 duplex *1

1


118

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

*1: A count of 100 in the counter is converted to 1 sheet of media and display the number of decimals are discarded.

NOTE• The total counters and the print counters count at a different timing, when a sheet

of media is properly ejected and when a sheet of media is fed, respectively.Therefore, the sum of each total counter value may not be same with the sum of each print counter value if a sheet of media cannot be ejected due to media jam inside the machine or other possible problems.

D. Coverage Information• Each coverage information is calculated and displayed based on the description shown

in the following table.

<Coverage information list>

NOTE• Coverage information can be used as a guide and may not completely reflect the

actual amount of toner used.

9.3.4 FONT LIST

A. POSTSCRIPT

B. PCL

Sheets Printed by Paper Size • The number of sheets used for each media size. Increment by one for both simplex and duplex When a sheet of

media is fedSheets Printed by Paper Type • The number of pages used per each media type. Increment by one for both simplex and duplex

Types of count Contents Count timing

Coverage information Contents

Normalized Coverage Information <Latest Job>

• Individual average dot coverage of four colors (Y,M,C,K) in the last job is calculated on an A4 basis.(The average of the ratios of dot space on each page when the print-able area is defined as 100% and shown in 0.1 percent increments)

Normalized Coverage Information <Total>

• Individual average dot coverage of four colors (Y,M,C,K) is calculated on an A4 basis for all prints performed after the printer was installed. (The average of the ratios of dot space on each page when the print-able area is defined as 100% and shown in 0.1 percent increments)

Function • Prints a PostScript font list.

Use • To determine which PostScript fonts are available on the printer.

Setting/procedure


Function • Prints a PCL font list.

Use • To determine which PCL fonts are available on the printer.

Setting/procedure



119

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.3.5 MENU MAP

9.3.6 DIRECTORY LIST

9.4 PAPER MENU

9.4.1 PAPER SOURCE

A. DEFAULT TRAY

B. TRAY 1(1) PAPER SIZE

Function • Prints a menu map.

Use • To see the printer’s menu structure.

Setting/procedure


Function • Prints a directory list of the hard disk kit’s contents.

Use • To check the data saved in the optional hard disk kit.

Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the priority feed tray.

Use • To set the priority media feed tray.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [DEFAULT TRAY] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.

• The default setting is TRAY 2.

TRAY 1 “TRAY 2” TRAY 3 TRAY 4 TRAY 5

NOTE• TRAY 3/TRAY 4/TRAY 5 can be selected only when one or more optional Lower

Feeder Units are installed.

Function • Sets the size of the media in tray 1.

Use • To specify the size of the media loaded in tray 1.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PAPER SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media size and press the MENU/SELECT key.

For North America• The default setting is LETTER.

For other destinations• The default setting is A4.

ANY/“LETTER”/LETTER-R/11x17/LEGAL/EXECUTIVE/A3WIDE/A3/“A4”/A4-R/A5/A6/B4(JIS)/B5(JIS)/B5(JIS)-R/B6(JIS)/GOVT LETTER/STATEMENT/FOLIO/SP FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/GOVT LEAGAL/16K/12x18/11x14/4x6/D8K/KAI8/KAI 16/KAI 32 /ENV C5/ENV C6/ENV DL/ENV MONARCH/ENV CHOU#3/ENV CHOU#4/B5(ISO)/ENV #10/ENV YOU#4/JPOST/JPOST-D/CUSTOM

NOTE• ANY specifies any media size.• CUSTOM is used to set a “CUSTOM media size.”


120

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) CUSTOM SIZE

(3) PAPER TYPE

Function • Sets the CUSTOM SIZE of media in tray 1.

Use • To specify the custom size media loaded in tray 1.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CUSTOM SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [WIDTH] or [LENGTH] and press MENU/SELECT key.3. Set desired number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.

For North America• The default setting of WIDTH is 8.50 inches.

WIDTH: 3.55 inches to 12.25 inches.

• The default setting of LENGTH is 11.00 inches.

LENGTH: 5.52 inches to 47.24 inches.

For other destinations• The default setting of WIDTH is 210 mm.

WIDTH: 90 mm to 311 mm.

• The default setting of LENGTH is 297 mm.

LENGTH: 140 mm to 1200 mm.

NOTE• By changing the [UNIT OF MEASURE] setting (INCHES/MILLIMETERS), the

custom size units are changed.

Function • Sets the media type for tray 1.

Use • To specify the type of media loaded in tray 1.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PAPER TYPE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press MENU/SELECT key.

• The default setting is PLAIN PAPER.

ANY/ “PLAIN PAPER”/RECYCLED/THICK 1/THICK 2/THICK 3/LABEL/TRANSPAR-ENCY/TRANSPARENCY 2/ENVELOPE/POSTCARD/LETTERHEAD/GLOSSY

NOTE• ANY identifies any media type.


121

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

C. TRAY 2(1) PAPER SIZE

(2) CUSTOM SIZE

Function • Sets the size of the media in tray 2.

Use • To specify the size of the media loaded in tray 2.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PAPER SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media size and press the MENU/SELECT key.



ANY/“LETTER”/LETTER-R/11x17/LEGAL/EXECUTIVE/A3WIDE/A3/“A4”/A4-R/A5/A6/B4(JIS)/B5(JIS)/B5(JIS)-R/B6(JIS)/GOVT LETTER/STATEMENT/FOLIO/SP FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/GOVT LEAGAL/16K/12 x 18/11 x 14/4 x 6/D8K/KAI8/KAI 16/KAI 32 /ENV C5/ENV C6/ENV DL/ENV MONARCH/ENV CHOU#3/ENV CHOU#4/B5(ISO)/ENV #10/ENV YOU#4/JPOST/JPOST-D/CUSTOM

NOTE• ANY specifies any media size.• CUSTOM is used to set a “CUSTOM media size.”• When The [SIZE SETTING] for Tray 2 is set to “AUTO”, the detected media size

will be displayed.

Function • Sets the CUSTOM SIZE of media in tray 2.

Use • To specify the custom size media loaded in tray 2.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CUSTOM SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [WIDTH] or [LENGTH] and press MENU/SELECT key.3. Set desired number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.









NOTE• By changing the “UNIT OF MEASURE” setting (INCHES/MILLIMETERS), the



122

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(3) PAPER TYPE

(4) SIZE SETTING

D. TRAY 3/TRAY 4/TRAY 5(1) PAPER SIZE

(2) PAPER TYPE

Function • Sets the media type for tray 2.

Use • To specify the type of media loaded in tray 2.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PAPER TYPE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press MENU/SELECT key.


ANY/ “PLAIN PAPER”/RECYCLED/THICK 1/THICK 2/THICK 3/LABE/TRANSPAR-ENCY/TRANSPARENCY 2/ENVELOPE/POSTCARD/LETTERHEAD/GLOSSY

NOTE• ANY identifies any media type.

Function • Sets the method to select the media size for tray 2.

Use • To set the media size for tray 2 at user’s option.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is AUTO.

“AUTO” USER SELECT

NOTE• When selecting “USER SELECT”, the media size will be set with [PAPER SIZE]

setting.

Function • Automatically detects the set media size and displays it.

Use • To check the media size.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PAPER SOURCE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired feed tray (TRAY 3-5) and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [PAPER SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

NOTE• TRAY3/TRAY4/TRAY5 can be selected only when one or more optional lower

feeder units are installed.

Function • Sets the media type for trays 3 to 5.

Use • To specify the type of media loaded in tray 3 to 5.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “PLAIN PAPER.”

ANY “PLAIN PAPER” RECYCLED

NOTE• TRAY3/TRAY4/TRAY5 can be selected only when one ore more optional lower

feeder units are installed.• ANY identifies any media type.


123 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

E. TRAY CHAINING

F. TRAY MAPPING(1) TRAY MAPPING MODE

(2) LOGICAL TRAY0-9

9.4.2 DUPLEX

Function • Sets auto tray switching.

Use • To specify that the printer should pull media from another tray when the specified tray runs is empty.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “OFF.”

ON “OFF”

1

Function • Selects whether or not the tray mapping function is used.

Use • To specify whether trays are mapped.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is OFF.

ON “OFF”

Function • Specifies whether jobs received from another manufacturer’s printer driver are printed using tray 1 to tray 5.

Use • To specify the media source for print jobs using another manufacturer’s printer driver.

Setting/procedure

• Only the default for LOGICAL TRAY 1 is PHYSICAL TRAY 1. PHYSICAL TRAY 2 is the default for all trays other than LOGICAL TRAY 1.

PHYSICAL TRAY 1 “PHYSICAL TRAY 2”PHYSICAL TRAY 3 PHYSICAL TRAY 4 PHYSICAL TRAY 5

NOTE• Only the mounted tray can be selected.

Function • Sets duplex printing mode.

Use • To specify duplex printing.OFF : Duplex print is OFFLONG EDGE : Duplex print is ON, long edgeSHORT EDGE : Duplex print is ON, short edge

Setting/procedure


“OFF” LONG EDGE SHORT EDGE

NOTE• This menu is available only when a duplex option is installed.• The setting in the printer driver overrides the setting in this menu.


124

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.4.3 COPIES

9.4.4 COLLATE

9.5 QUALITY MENU

9.5.1 COLOR MODE

9.5.2 BRIGHTNESS

Function • Sets the number of prints.

Use • To specify the number of copies of the job to be printed.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [COPIES] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired print number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

• The default setting is “1” copy.

“1” copy to 9999 copies.

NOTE• The setting in the printer driver overrides the setting in this menu.

Function • Sets printing in sets.

Use • To print several sets of multiple pages.ON : Print in sets.OFF : Print in page.

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”

NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional hard disk kit is installed.• The setting in the printer driver overrides the setting in this menu.

Function • Sets the color mode for printing.

Use • To specify whether jobs should be printed in color or grayscale.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is COLOR.

“COLOR” GRAYSCALE

Function • Sets the brightness of the printed image.

Use • To adjust the brightness of the printed image.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 0 %.

-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %


125

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.5.3 PCL SETTING

A. CONTRAST

B. IMAGE PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE

(2) RGB INTENT

(3) RGB GRAY

Function • Sets the contrast of a PCL printed image.

Use • To adjust the contrast of a PCL printed image.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 0%.

-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %

Function • Sets the RGB color space of the image to be printed.

Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing the image (picture).sRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is sRGB.

DEVICE COLOR “sRGB”

Function • Sets the RGB characteristics of the image to be printed.

Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing the image (picture).

VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color vividness.

PHOTOGRAPHIC: Color conversion characteristic suited to the image emphasiz-ing on color image.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is PHOTOGRAPHIC.

VIVID “PHOTOGRAPHIC”

Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the image to be printed.

Use • To set the gray print method that is used for the printed image (picture).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with

toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK ONLY : Print gray only with K toner.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is COMPOSITE BLACK.

“COMPOSITE BLACK” BLACK AND GRAY BLACK ONLY


126

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(4) HALFTONE

C. TEXT PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE

(2) RGB INTENT

(3) RGB GRAY

Function • Sets the halftone characteristic of image to be printed.

Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for the printed image (picture.)LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print

image.DETAIL : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the balance between the

resolution and the tone reproducibility of the print image.SMOOTH : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the tone reproducibility of

the print image.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is DETAIL.

LINE ART “DETAIL” SMOOTH

Function • Sets the RGB color space of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing text (letter).sRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.

Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the RGB characteristic of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing text (letter).



Setting/procedure

• The default setting is VIVID.

“VIVID” PHOTOGRAPHIC

Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the gray print method that is used for printing text (letter).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with


Setting/procedure

• The default setting is BLACK AND GRAY.

COMPOSITE BLACK “BLACK AND GRAY” BLACK ONLY


127

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(4) HALFTONE

D. GRAPHICS PRINTING

9.5.4 PS SETTING

A. IMAGE PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE

(2) RGB INTENT

Function • Sets the halftone characteristic of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for printing text (letter).LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print



the print image.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is LINE ART.

“LINE ART” DETAIL SMOOTH

Function • Sets the RGB characteristics for graphics printing.

Use • To set each characteristic for printing graphics (figures).

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is AS TEXT.

AS IMAGE “AS TEXT”

Function • Sets the RGB color space of the image to be printed.

Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing the image (picture).sRGB...BlueAdjustRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.

Setting/procedure


DEVICE COLOR / “sRGB” /AppleRGB /AdobeRGB1998 /ColorMatchRGB /BlueAdjustRGB

Function • Sets the RGB characteristics of the image to be printed.

Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing the image (picture).

VIVID : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color vividness.

PHOTOGRAPHIC : Color conversion characteristic suited to the image empha-sizing on color image.

RELATIVE COLOR : Reproduce the color that minimize the color difference between original and print by adjusting the basic color (white.)

ABSOLUTE COLOR : Reproduce the color that maintains the absolute color within the device reproduced color.

Setting/procedure


VIVID “PHOTOGRAPHIC” RELATIVE COLOR ABSOLUTE COLOR


128

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(3) RGB GRAY

(4) DESTINATION PROF

(5) HALFTONE

B. TEXT PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE

Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the image to be printed.

Use • To set the gray print method that is processed by the printer for the printed image (picture).

COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with


Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the output profile.

Use • To set the custom profile used for output.AUTO : Select automatically appropriate output profile that has been pre-

set at the printer with other print conditions.Custom Profile : Custom profile that has been downloaded to the printer by user.

Setting/procedure


“AUTO” Custom Profile...

Function Sets the halftone characteristic of image to be printed.

Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for the printed image (picture.)LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print



the print image.

Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the RGB color space of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing text (letter).sRGB...BlueAdjustRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.

Setting/procedure




129

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) RGB INTENT

(3) RGB GRAY


(5) HALFTONE

Function • Sets the RGB characteristic of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing text (letter).





Setting/procedure


“VIVID” PHOTOGRAPHIC RELATIVE COLOR ABSOLUTE COLOR

Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the gray print method that is used for printing text (letter).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with


Setting/procedure






Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the halftone characteristic of the text to be printed.

Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for printing text (letter).LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print



the print image.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is LINE ART.

“LINE ART” DETAIL SMOOTH


130

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

C. GRAPHICS PRINTING(1) RGB SOURCE

(2) RGB INTENT

(3) RGB GRAY


Function • Sets the RGB color space of the graphics to be printed.

Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for printing graphics (figures).sRGB...BlueAdjustRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.

Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the RGB characteristic of the graphics to be printed.

Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for printing graphics (figures).





Setting/procedure


“VIVID” PHOTOGRAPHIC RELATIVE COLOR ABSOLUTE COLOR

Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the graphics to be printed.

Use • To set the gray print method that is used for printing graphics (figures).COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with


Setting/procedure






Setting/procedure




131 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(5) HALFTONE

D. SIMULATION(1) SIMULATION PROF

(2) SIMULATION INTENT

(3) CMYK GRAY

(4) IMAGE CMYK GRAY• magicolor 7450 II only

Function • Sets the RGB characteristics for graphics printing.

Use • To set each characteristic for printing graphics (figures).

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is AS TEXT.

AS IMAGE “AS TEXT”

Function • Sets the simulation profile.

Use • To set a CMYK simulation profile at implementation of the simulation.SWOP...DIC : Profile that has been preset at the printer.Custom profile : Custom profile that has been downloaded to the printer by users.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is NONE.

“NONE”/SWOP/Euroscale/CommercialPress/TOYO/DIC/Custom Profile...

Function • Sets the color characteristics.

Use • To set the color characteristics at the implementation of the simulation.RELATIVE COLOR : Reproduce the color that minimizes the color difference

between original and print by adjusting the basic color (white.)


Setting/procedure

• The default setting is RELATIVE COLOR.

“RELATIVE COLOR” ABSOLUTE COLOR

Function • Sets CMYK gray reproduction.

Use • To set the CMYK data K maintain method at the implementation of the simulation.COMPOSITE BLACK : Print according to the result of color conversion with profile.BLACK AND GRAY : Print by maintaining the value only for black (C=M=Y=0,

K=255)BLACK ONLY : Print by maintaining the value only for gray (C=M=Y=0,

K=any)

Setting/procedure



1

Function • Select whether or not grays in image data are reproduced using the four CMYK col-ors.

ON : Grays in image data are reproduced using the four CMYK colors.OFF : Grays in image data are reproduced using only the K color.

Use

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”


132

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.5.5 CALIBRATION

A. TONE CALIBRATION

B. AIDC PROCESS

C. CMYK DENSITY(1) CYAN

(2) MAGENTA

(3) YELLOW

Function • Sets the gradation adjustment (Image stabilization with the controller).

Use • To use for a particular calibration made by users.ON : Gradation adjustment is ON.OFF : Gradation adjustment is OFF.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “ON.”

“ON” OFF

Function• Controls the image stability.• Controls the image stability.

Use • To be used to adjust image quality.• To be used when the transfer belt unit and/or the transfer roller are replaced.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “CANCEL.”

EXCUTE “CANCEL”

Function • Sets the cyan level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respectively.

Use • To set the cyan level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respectively.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “0.”

-3 to +3

Function• Sets the magenta level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respec-

tively.

Use • To set the magenta level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respec-tively.

Setting/procedure


-3 to +3

Function • Sets the yellow level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respectively.

Use • To set the yellow level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respectively.

Setting/procedure


-3 to +3


133 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(4) BLACK

9.5.6 COLOR SEPARATION

9.5.7 THIN LINE MODE

• magicolor 7450 II only

9.6 CAMERA DIRECT

9.6.1 PAPER SOURCE

Function • Sets the black level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW area respectively.

Use • To set the black level for the HIGHLIGHT, MIDDLE, and SHADOW are respectively.

Setting/procedure


-3 to +3

Function • Sets the color separation function.

Use • To create color separations.

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”

1

Function • Sets the thin line mode function.

Use• If ON is selected, printing is performed in THIN LINE MODE.

In THIN LINE MODE, text and line data are reproduced thinner.

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”

Function • Sets the tray using for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To change the tray using for camera direct photo printing.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is TRAY 2.

TRAY1” “TRAY2” TRAY3 TRAY4 TRAY5

NOTE• Only the mounted tray can be selected.


134

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.6.2 LAYOUT

9.6.3 PAPER MARGIN

9.6.4 IMAGE QUALITY

A. BRIGHTNESS

B. CONTRAST

C. RGB SOURCE

Function • Sets the number of images printed on one page for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To specify the number of camera direct photo printing images to be printed on each sheet.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 1-UP.

“1-UP” 2-UP 3-UP

4-UP 6-UP 8-UP

1

1

2

1

2

3

1

3

2

4

1

3

2

4

5 6

1

3

2

4

5 6

7 8

Function • Sets the media margin for direct photo printing.

Use • To perform direct photo printing with the minimum media margin.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is STANDARD.

“STANDARD” MINIMUM

Function • Sets the brightness of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To adjust the brightness of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 0 %.

-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %

Function • Sets the contrast of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To adjust the contrast of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 0%.

-15 % -10 % -5 % “0 %” +5 % +10 % +15 %

Function • Sets the RGB color space of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To set the input RGB color space that is used for camera direct photo printing.sRGB : Profile that has been preset to the printer.DVICE COLOR : It uses the device color in the color space.

Setting/procedure




135

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

D. RGB INTENT

E. RGB GRAY

F. HALFTONE

9.7 INTERFACE MENU

9.7.1 JOB TIMEOUT

Function • Sets the RGB characteristics of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To set the color conversion characteristic from input RGB to device CMYK that is used for camera direct photo printing.



Setting/procedure


VIVID “PHOTOGRAPHIC”

Function • Sets the RGB gray reproduction of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To set the gray print method that is processed by the printer for camera direct photo printing.

COMPOSITE BLACK : Print gray with the toner of 4 colors CMYK.BLACK AND GRAY : Print black (R=G=B=0) only with K toner and print gray with


Setting/procedure



Function Sets the halftone characteristic of the printed image for camera direct photo printing.

Use • To set the halftone characteristic that is used for camera direct photo printing.LINE ART : HALFTONE characteristic that emphasizes the resolution of the print



the print image.

Setting/procedure



Function • Sets the time to activate JOB TIMEOUT.

Use • To specify the amount of time before a print job times out.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 15 seconds.

5 seconds to 300 seconds


136

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.7.2 ETHERNET

NOTE• When the ETHERNET setting is changed, the printer restarts automatically.

A. TCP/IP(1) ENABLE

(2) IP ADDRESS

(3) SUBNET MASK

Function • Enables TCP/IP.

Use • To specify that the printer is connected to a TCP/IP network. YES : Enable TCP/IP. Print can be made at TCP/IP environment.NO : Disable TCP/IP. Print cannot be made at TCP/IP environment.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is YES.

“YES” NO

NOTE• The screen displays [IP ADDRESS], [SUBNET MASK], [DEFAULT GATEWAY],

and [DHCP/BOOTP] only when [ENABLE/YES] is selected.

Function • Sets the IP address of the printer used for the network.

Use • To set the printer’s IP address.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [IP ADDRESS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired IP address (first bite) with the up key /down key and press the right

key .3. Repeat the above procedures and set the IP address up to fourth bite.4. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

NOTE• When setting the IP address manually, [DHCP/BOOTP] (IP auto acquisition

function) setting is set to [OFF] automatically.• When IP address is not allocated from the server, the IP address is set auto-

matically within the range “169.254.0.0. to 169.254.255.255.”

Function • Sets the subnet mask of the printer used in the network.

Use • To set the printer’s subnet mask.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [SUBNET MASK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired subnet mask (first bite) with the up key /down key and press the right

key .3. Repeat the above procedures and set the subnet mask up to fourth bite.4. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

• The default setting is “255.255.000.000.”

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255


137

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(4) DEFAULT GATEWAY

(5) DHCP/BOOTP

(6) TELNET

B. NETWARE(1) ENABLE

Function • Sets the gateway address of the printer used in the network.

Use • To set the printer’s gateway address.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [DEFAULT GATEWAY] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired default gateway address (first bite) with the up key /down key and

press the right key .3. Repeat the above procedures and set the default gatewat address up to fourth bite.4. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

• The default setting is “000.000.000.000.”

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255

Function • DHCP: Automatically acquires an IP address from the DHCP server, if there is one in the network, and specifies whether to load other network information.

• BOOTP: Automatically acquires an IP address from BOOTP and specifies whether to load other network information.

Use • To automatically acquire an IP address and load other network information.YES : Enable IP auto acquisition setting.No : Disable IP auto acquisition setting.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is ON.

“ON” OFF

NOTE• When [TCP/IP/IP ADDRESS] is enabled, the [DHCP/BOOTP] setting is changed

to [OFF.”• When IP address is not allocated from the server, [TCP/IP/IP ADDRESS] is set

automatically set within the range “169.254.0.0. to 169.254.255.255.”

Function • Select whether to enable or disable TELNET transmissions.

Use • To specify that the printer is connected by TELNET transmissions.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is ENABLE.

“ENABLE” DISABLE

Function • Enables NetWare.

Use • To specify that the printer is connected to a NetWare network.YES : Enable NetWare. Printing can be done via NetWare.No : Disable NetWare. Printing cannot be done via NetWare.

Setting/procedure


“YES” “NO”


138

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

C. APPLETALK(1) ENABLE

D. SPEED/DUPLEX

9.7.3 CAMERA DIRECT

9.8 SYS DEFAULT MENU

9.8.1 LANGUAGE

Function • Enables AppleTalk.

Use • To specify that the printer is connected to an AppleTalk network.YES : Enable AppleTalk. Printing can be done via AppleTalk.No : Disable Apple Talk. Printing cannot be done via AppleTalk.

Setting/procedure


“YES” NO

Function • Sets the communication speed and method of network.

Use • To set the network communication speed and method.

Setting/procedure

• Setting itemsNetwork speed (SPEED): AUTO, 10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1,000MbpsDuplex mode (DUP): AUTO, Full-duplex mode, Half-duplex mode


“AUTO” 10BASE FULL 10BASE HALF100BASE FULL 100BASE HALF 1000BASE FULL

Function • Select whether to enable or disable camera direct printing.ENABLE : CAMERA DIRECT menu is appeared, and camera direct printing is

enabled.DISABLE : CAMERA DIRECT menu is disappeared, and camera direct printing is

disabled.

Use

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is ENABLE.

“ENABLE” DISABLE

Function • Sets the language of the control panel display.

Use • To change the language of the control panel display at user’s option.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “ENGLISH.”

“ENGLISH”/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/PORTUGUESE/CZECH/JAPA-NEASE/ KOREAN/CHINESE (SIMPLIFIED)/CHINESE (TRADITIONAL)/DUTCH


139

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.8.2 EMULATION

A. DEF. EMULATION

B. POSTSCRIPT(1) WAIT TIMEOUT

(2) PS ERROR PAGE

(3) PS PROTOCOL

C. PCL(1) CR/LF MAPPING

Function • To set the PDL (Page Description Language).

Use • To fix the PDL as necessary. It usually switches automatically.

Setting/procedure


“AUTO” POSTSCRIPT PCL

Function • Sets the amount of time to wait for a PostScript file.

Use • To set the amount of time to wait for a PostScript file before the print job times out.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [WAIT TIMEOUT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired time with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.

• The default setting is 0 second.

“0” second to 300 seconds.

Function • Specifies whether error pages are printed at the time of a PostScript error.

Use • To specify whether error pages are printed after a PostScript error occurs.ON : Error pages are printed at the time of PostScript error.OFF : Error pages are not printed at the time of PostScript error.

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”

Function • Sets the protocol to be used for PostScript printing.

Use • To use the protocol when printing by PostScript printing.AUTO : Automatic recognitionNORMAL : ASCII letter code dataBINARY : Binary data

Setting/procedure


“AUTO” NORMAL BINARY

Function • Sets the linefeed code for PCL printing.

Use • To specify the type of linefeed to be used for PCL printing.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is “CR=CR LF=LF.”

“CR=CR LF=LF” CR=CRLF LF=LF CR=CR LF=LFCR CR=CRLF LF=LFCR


140

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) LINES PER PAGE

(3) FONT SOURCE <FONT NUMBER>

<PITCH SIZE>

Function • Sets the lines per page for PCL printing.

Use • To set the number of lines to be printed per page for PCL jobs.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [LINES PER PAGE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired line number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

• The default setting is 60 lines.

5 lines to 128 lines

Function • Sets the PCL font to be used for PCL printing.

Use • To set the font to be used for printing PCL jobs.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [FONT NUMBER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired font with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT key.

• The default setting is 0.

“0” to 102

NOTE• According to the selected [FONT NUMBER], [PITCH SIZE] or [POINT SIZE] set-

ting is available.• Details on the font which corresponds to the font No. can be checked by the

PCL font list.See P.118

Function • Sets the pitch size of the PCL font for PCL printing.

Use • To set the pitch size of the font to be used for printing PCL jobs.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PITCH SIZE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired pitch size with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

• The default setting is 10.00 pt.

0.44 pt to 99.99 pt

NOTE• When one of the following “FONT NUMBERs” is selected, “PITCH SIZE” set-

ting is available.FONT NUMBER: 0 to 5, 21 to 23, 54 to 57, 81, 82.


141

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

<SYMBOL SET>

9.8.3 PAPER

A. DEFAULT PAPER(1) PAPER SIZE

Function • Sets the symbol set for PCL printing.

Use • To set the symbol set to be used for printing PCL jobs.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is PC8.

“PC8”/DESKTOP/ISO4/ISO6/ISO11/ISO15/ISO17/ISO21/ISO60/ISO69/ISOL1/ISOL2/ISOL5/ISOL6/ISOL9/LEGAL/MATH8/MCTEXT/MSPUBL/PC775/PC850/PC852/PC858 /PC8DN/PC8TK/PC1004/PIFONT/PSMATH/PSTEXT/ROMAN8/WIN30/WINBALT/WINL1/WINL2/WINL5/ARABIC8/HPWARA/PC864ARA/HEBREW7/HEBREW8/ISOHEB/PC862HEB/ISOCYR/PC866CYR/WINCYR/PC866UKR/GREEK8/WINGRK/PC851GRK/PC8GRK/ ISOGRK

Function • Sets the default media size.

Use • To set the default media size.

Setting/procedure



“LETTER”/11x17/LEGAL/EXECUTIVE/A3WIDE/A3/“A4”/A5/A6/B4(JIS)/B5(JIS)/B6(JIS)/GOVT LETTER/STATEMENT/FOLIO/SP FOLIO/UK QUARTO/FOOLSCAP/GOVT LEAGAL/16K/12x18/11x14/4x6/D8K/KAI8/KAI 16/KAI 32/ENV C5/ENV C6/ENV DL/ENV MONARCH/ENV CHOU#3/ENV CHOU#4/B5(ISO)/ENV #10/ENV YOU#4/JPOST/JPOST-D/CUSTOM

1


142

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) CUSTOM

(3) PAPER TYPE

B. DETECT PAPER SIZE

1

Function • Sets the custom media width and length.

Use • To set the width and length of the custom media size.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CUSTOM] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [WIDTH] or [LENGTH] and press MENU/SELECT key.3. Set desired number with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.









NOTE• By changing the [UNIT OF MEASURE] setting (INCHES/MILLIMETERS), the


Function • Sets the default media type.

Use • To set the default media type.

Setting/procedure


“PLAIN PAPER” /RECYCLED/THICK 1/THICK 2/THICK 3/LABEL/TRANSPARENCY/TRANSPARENCY 2/ENVELOPE/POSTCARD/LETTERHEAD/GLOSSY

Function • Sets the standard for the automatic media size detection.

Use • To switch the criteria for the automatic media size detection from Inch to milli meter.

Setting/procedure

For North America• The default setting of WIDTH is INCHE SIZE.

For other destinations• The default setting of WIDTH is MILLIMETER SIZE.

INCHE SIZE MILLIMETER SIZE


143 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

C. UNIT OF MEASURE

9.8.4 STARTUP OPTIONS

A. DO STARTUP PAGE

9.8.5 AUTO CONTINUE

9.8.6 HOLD JOB TIMEOUT

Function • Sets the measurement units for CUSTOM SIZE mode.• Sets the measurement units for SYS DEFAULT MENU/DEFAULT PAPER/CUSTOM

SIZE mode.

Use • To change media measurement units.

Setting/procedure

For North America• The default setting is INCHES.

For other destinations• The default setting is MILLIMETERS.

INCHES MILLIMETERS

Function • Sets whether a startup page is printed at startup of the printer.

Use • To specify whether a startup page is printed.ON : Start up page is printed at startup the printer.OFF : Start up page is not printed at startup of the printer.

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”

1

Function • At the time of the following operator call, continues auto printing by ignoring the media type or size.

• “PAPER EMPTY” (except “MANUAL FEED”), “xxxx SIZE ERROR”, “xxxx TYPE ERROR”.

Use • To specify whether printing should continue when the specified media size and type are not available.

ON : Auto continuous printing is ON.OFF : Auto continuous printing is OFF.

Setting/procedure


ON “OFF”

Function • Sets the amount of time before a job saved temporarily in the printer is automatically deleted.

Use • To change the amount of time a job is held before being deleted.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is DISABLE (No auto delete.).

“DISABLE” 1 hour 4 hours 1 day 1 week



144

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.8.7 ENERGY SAVER

9.8.8 ENERGY SAVER TIME

9.8.9 MENU TIMEOUT

9.8.10 LCD BRIGHTNESS

Function • Sets whether the printer should go into energy saver mode when not printing or pro-cessing a print job and when the control panel is not being used. To set the amount of time before energy saver mode is activated, use the “ENERGY SAVER TIME” menu.

• Energy saver mode is automatically canceled when any of the following operations is performed:

The machine is restarted.A print job is received.Any of the keys on the control panel is pressed.

Use • To specify whether energy saver mode is to be used.

DEEP SLEEP : Heater lamp is turned OFF. The warmup time to recover is 99 sec. or less.

LIGHT SLEEP : Temperature control is provided with a decreased fusing tempera-ture so that power consumption in the energy saver mode can be minimized. The warmup time to recover is 30 sec. or less.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is DEEP SLEEP.

“DEEP SLEEP” LIGHT SLEEP OFF

Function • Sets the amount of time before the machine enters energy saver mode after the last print is received or the last key operated.

Use • To change the amount of time before the machine enters energy saver mode.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 30 minutes.

15 minutes “30 minutes” 1 hour 3 hours

NOTE• This menu is available only when [ENERGY SAVER] is not set to [OFF].

Function • Sets the amount of time before the control panel returns to the status screen from menu mode and the help display.

Use • To set the amount of the time before the control panel returns to the status screen from the menu and the help display.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is 2 minutes.

OFF 1 minute “2 minutes”

Function • Sets the brightness of the control panel LCD display.

Use • To set the brightness of the control panel LCD display.

Setting/procedure

The default setting is 0.

-3 -2 -1 “0” +1 +2 +3


145

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.8.11 SECURITY

A. CHANGE PASSWORD

B. LOCK PANEL

Function • Sets the password used for the LOCK PANEL function.

Use • To change the password used for the LOCK PANEL function.0000 : Panel lock function is OFF.0001 to FFFF : Valid password for panel lock function.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CHANGE PASSWORD] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Set desired password (first digit) with the up key /down key and press the right

key .3. Repeat the above procedures to set up to fourth digit password.

• The default setting is 0000.

“0000” to FFFF

NOTE• Make sure to set the password to something other than “0000” when the

[LOCK PANEL] function is set to [ON].• If you forget the password, it can be initiated (0000) with [SERVICE MENU/

RESTORE PASSWORD].See P.186

Function • Protects the Menu (except the service menu) with a password.

Use • To make the Menu (except the service menu) impossible to change unless the cor-rect password is entered.

OFF : Panel lock function is OFF.MINIMUM : Panel lock function is ON. Protect the operation of [INTERFACE

MENU], [SYS DEFAULT MENU].ON : Panel lock function is ON.

Protect the operation of [PROF/PRINT MENU], [PRINT MENU], [PAPER MENU], [QUALITY MENU], [INTERFACE MENU], [SYS DEFAULT MENU].

Setting/procedure


“OFF” MINIMUM ON


146

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.8.12 CLOCK

A. DATE

B. TIME

9.8.13 HDD FORMAT

Function • Sets the date of the printer’s built-in clock.

Use • To change the date of the printer’s built-in clock.

Setting/procedure

DATE (DD.MM.YY): For EuropeDATE (MM.DD.YY): For North AmericaDATE(YY.MM.DD): For Japan, Asia, China

The following shows how to set DATE (DD.MM.YY).1. Select [CLOCK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [DATE (DD.MM.YY)] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Set date with the up key /down key and press the right key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set month and year.5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

DD : 01 to 31MM : 01 to 12YY : 2005 to 2032

Function • Sets the time of the printer’s built-in clock.

Use • To change the time of the printer’s built-in clock.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CLOCK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [TIME] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Set hour with the up key /down key and press the right key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set minute.5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

Function • Initializes the format of the optional hard disk kit.

Use • To initialize the format of the optional hard disk kit.USER AREA ONLY : Initialize only user areaALL : Initialize all area

Setting/procedure

1. Select [HDD FORMAT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired initialization method and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. [ARE YOU SURE?] is displayed.4. By pressing the MENU/SELECT key, initialization starts. By pressing the CANCEL

key without pressing the MENU/SELECT key, the start of initialization can be can-celled.

5. The printer restarts and the hard disk is initialized. Once the initialization starts, it cannot be cancelled.

• The default setting is USER AREA ONLY.

USER AREA ONLY ALL



147

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.8.14 CARD FORMAT

9.8.15 RESTORE DEFAULTS

Function • Initializes the format of the optional compact flash card.

Use • To initialize the format of the optional compact flash card.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CARD FORMAT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. [ARE YOU SURE?] is displayed.3. By pressing the MENU/SELECT key, initialization starts. By pressing the CANCEL

key without pressing the MENU/SELECT key, the start of initialization can be can-celled.


NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional compact flash card is installed.

Function • Restores the factory default of each setting.

Use • To restore the defaults of all settings.RESTORE NETWORK : Restore the default for [INTERFACE MENU/ETHERNET]

setting.RESTORE PRINTER : Restore the default for [PAPER MENU], [QUALITY

MENU], [SYS DEFAULT MENU] and [CAMERA DIRECT] setting.

RESTORE ALL : Restore defaults for all settings.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [RESTORE DEFFAULTS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired mode and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. [ARE YOU SURE?] is displayed.4. By pressing the MENU/SELECT key, initialization starts.

By pressing the CANCEL key without pressing the MENU/SELECT key, the start of initialization can be cancelled.


• The default setting is RESTORE NETWORK.

RESTORE NETWORK RESTORE PRINTER RESTORE ALL

1


148

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

List of reset items 1

*: Destination items. For details, see the page referenced.


ItemReset item

Initial valueRef. pageRESTORE

NETWORKRESTORE PRINTER

RESTORE ALL

PAPER MENU

PAPER SOURCE

DEFAULT TRAY ⎯ Reset Reset TRAY2 P.119

TRAY1 PAPER SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset Letter P.119

CUSTOM SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH: 8.5inches

LENGTH: 11inchesP.120

⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH:210mmLENGTH:297mm

PAPER TYPE ⎯ Reset Reset PLAIN PAPER P.120

TRAY2 PAPER SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset Letter P.121

CUSTOM SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH: 8.5inches

LENGTH: 11inchesP.121

⎯ Reset Reset WIDTH:210mmLENGTH:297mm

PAPER TYPE ⎯ Reset Reset PLAIN PAPER P.122

SIZE SETTING ⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.122

TRAY3 to 5

PAPER TYPE⎯ Reset Reset PLAIN PAPER P.122

TRAY CHAINING ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.123

DUPLEX ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.123

COPIES ⎯ Reset Reset 1 P.124

COLLATE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.124

1

ItemReset item



RESTORE ALL

QUALITY MENU

COLOR MODE ⎯ Reset Reset COLOR P.124

BRIGHTNESS ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.124

PCL SETTING

CONTRAST ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.125

IMAGE PRINTING

RGB SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset sRGB P.125

RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset PHOTO-

GRAPHIC P.125

RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOSITE BLACK P.125

HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset DETAIL P.126

TEXT PRINTING


RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset VIVID P.126

RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset ResetBLACK AND

GRAYP.126

HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset LINE ART P.127

GRAPHICS PRINTING

⎯ Reset Reset AS IMAGE P.127


149 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g


QUALITY MENU

PS SETTING

IMAGE PRINTING


RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset Reset PHOTO-

GRAPHIC P.127

RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOSITE BLACK P.128

DESTINA-TION PROF

⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.128


TEXT PRINTING



RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset BLACK AND GRAY P.129

DESTINA-TION PROF


HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset LINE ART P.129

GRAPHICS PRINTING



RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset BLACK AND GRAY P.130

DESTINA-TION PROF


HALFTONE ⎯ Reset Reset AS IMAGE P.131

PS SETTING

SIMULA-TION

SIMULA-TION PROF

⎯ Reset Reset NONE P.131

SIMULA-TION

INTENT⎯ Reset Reset RELATIVE

COLOR P.131

CMYK GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOSITE

BLACK P.131

IMAGE CMYK GRAY

⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.131

CALIBRA-TION

TONE CALIBRATION

⎯ Reset Reset ON P.132

CMYK DENSITY

CYAN ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.132

MAGENTA ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.132

YELLOW ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.132

BLACK ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.133

COLOR SEPARATION ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.133

THIN LINE MODE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.133

ItemReset item



RESTORE ALL

1

1


150

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g




ItemReset item



RESTORE ALL

CAMERA DIRECT

PAPER SOURCE ⎯ Reset Reset TRAY2 P.133

LAYOUT ⎯ Reset Reset 1-UP P.134

PAPER MARGIN ⎯ Reset Reset STANDARD P.134

IMAGE QUALITY

BRIGHTNESS ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.134

CONTRAST ⎯ Reset Reset 0 % P.134


RGB INTENT ⎯ Reset ResetPHOTO-

GRAPHICP.135

RGB GRAY ⎯ Reset Reset COMPOS-ITE BLACK P.135


ItemReset item



RESTORE ALL

INTER-FACE MENU

JOB TIMEOUT Reset ⎯ Reset 15 seconds P.135

ETHERNET TCP/IP ENABLE Reset ⎯ Reset YES P.136

IP ADDRESS Reset ⎯ Reset

000.000.000.000

P.136

SUBNET MASK

Reset ⎯ Reset255.255.000.000

P.136

DEFAULT GATEWAY Reset ⎯ Reset

000.000.000.000

P.137

DHCP/BOOTP

Reset ⎯ Reset ON P.137

TELNET Reset ⎯ Reset ENABLE P.137

NETWARE Reset ⎯ Reset YES P.137

APPLE TALK Reset ⎯ Reset YES P.138

SPEED/DUPLEX Reset ⎯ Reset AUTO P.138

CAMERA DIRECT Reset ⎯ Reset ENABLE P.138


151 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g


ItemReset item



RESTORE ALL

SYS DEFAULT

MENU

LANGUAGE ⎯ Reset Reset ENGLISH P.138

EMULA-TION

DEF. EMULATION ⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.139

POST-SCRIPT

WAIT TIM-EOUT ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.139

PS ERROR PAGE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.139

PS PRO-TOCOL ⎯ Reset Reset AUTO P.139

PCL CR/LF MAPPING ⎯ Reset Reset

CR=CRLF=LF

P.139

LINES PER PAGE ⎯ Reset Reset 60 P.140

FONT SOURCE/

FONT NUMBER

⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.140

FONT SOURCE/

PITCH SIZE

⎯ Reset Reset 10.00 P.140

FONT SOURCE/SYMBOL

SET

⎯ Reset Reset PC8 P.140

PAPER DEFAULT PAPER

PAPER SIZE ⎯ Reset Reset LETTER P.141

CUSTOM SIZE/

WIDTH⎯ Reset Reset 8.5 inches

P.142CUSTOM

SIZE/LENGTH

⎯ Reset Reset 11.00 inches

PAPER TYPE ⎯ Reset Reset

PLAIN PAPER

P.142

DETECT PAPER SIZE

⎯ Reset Reset INCHE SIZE P.142

UNIT OF MEASURE ⎯ Reset Reset INCHES P.143

STARTUP OPTIONS

DO STARTUP PAGE ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.143

AUTO CONTINUE ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.143

HOLD JOB TIMEOUT ⎯ Reset Reset DISABLE P.143

ENERGY SAVER ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.144

ENERGY SAVER TIME ⎯ Reset Reset 30 minutes P.144

MENU TIMEOUT ⎯ Reset Reset 2 minutes P.144

LCD BRIGHTNESS ⎯ Reset Reset 0 P.144

SECURITYCHANGE PASSWORD ⎯ Reset Reset 0000 P.145

LOCK PANEL ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.145

HDD FORMAT ⎯ Reset ResetUSER AREA

ONLYP.146

1


152

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g


*: Destination items. For details, see the page referenced.**: XXXXXX are the final 6 digits of the printer’s MAC address.

SYS DEFAULT

MENU

CARD FORMAT⎯ Reset Reset

USER AREA ONLY

P.147

RESTORE DEFAULTS⎯ Reset Reset

RESTORE NETWORK

P.147

ENABLE WARNING

PAPER EMPTY

TRAY 1 ⎯ Reset Reset OFF P.153

TRAY 2 ⎯ Reset Reset ON




TONER LOW ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.154

I-UNIT LOW ⎯ Reset Reset ON P.154

IMAGING UNIT LIFE ⎯ Reset Reset STOP P.154

ItemReset item



RESTORE ALL

Item

Reset item

Initial value Ref. pageRESTORE NETWORK

RESTORE PRINTER

RESTORE ALL

Page-Scope Web

Connec-tion

Admin Password ⎯ Reset Reset administrator ⎯

Refresh Rate ⎯ Reset Reset 30 sec. ⎯

Contact Name ⎯ Reset Reset

KONICA MINOLTA Customer Support

⎯

Contact Information ⎯ Reset Resethttp://printer.

konicaminolta.com/

⎯

Contact Utility Link ⎯ Reset Reset http://pagescope.com/

⎯

Corporate URL ⎯ Reset Resethttp://printer.

konicaminolta.com/

⎯

Supplies and Accessories ⎯ Reset Reset http://www.q-shop.com/

⎯

Product Help URL ⎯ Reset Resethttp://printer.

konicaminolta.com/

⎯

Auto IP Reset ⎯ Reset DHCP ⎯

WINS/NetBIOS Resolution Reset ⎯ Reset Checked ⎯

** NetBIOS Name Reset ⎯ Reset MC7450-XXXXXX

⎯

Domain/Workgroup Reset ⎯ Reset WORK-GROUP

⎯

Use DHCP Reset ⎯ Reset Checked ⎯

IPP Config Printer Name Reset ⎯ Reset Blank ⎯

IPP Config Printer Location Reset ⎯ Reset Blank ⎯


153

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.8.16 ENABLE WARNING

A. PAPER EMPTY(1) TRAY1

(2) TRAY2

(3) TRAY3

(4) TRAY4

Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 1 paper empty” (manual feed tray)” message is displayed as a normal message when it is empty.

Use • To specify whether to display a “Tray 1 paper empty” message as a normal message.ON : Media empty message is displayed on normal message when tray is empty.OFF : Media empty message is not displayed on normal message when tray is

empty.

Setting/procedure


“OFF” ON

Function • Specifies whether a “Tray 2 paper empty” message is displayed as a normal mes-sage when it is empty.


empty.

Setting/procedure


OFF “ON”



empty.

Setting/procedure


OFF “ON”

NOTE• This menu is available only when an optional lower feeder unit is installed.



empty.

Setting/procedure


OFF “ON”



154

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(5) TRAY5

B. TONER LOW

C. I-UNIT LOW

9.8.17 IMAGING UNIT LIFE



empty.

Setting/procedure


OFF “ON”


Function• Specifies whether or not a warning appears when the toner is about to run out.

Use

Setting/procedure


“ON” OFF

Function • Specifies whether or not a warning appears when the imaging unit is about to reach the end of its service life.Use

Setting/procedure


“ON” OFF

Function• Specifies whether printing stops or continues when a imaging unit service life has

been reached.

Use • To specify whether printing should stop or continue printing when a imaging unit ser-vice life has been reached.

STOP : Print stops when a imaging unit service life has been reached. Print cannot be started until the imaging unit is exchanged.

CONTINUE: Print continues even if a imaging unit service life has been reached. Print is available, however the printing with proper image is impossi-ble.

Setting/procedure

• The default setting is STOP.

“STOP” CONTINUE


155

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

9.9 MAINTENANCE MENU

9.9.1 How to enter the MAINTENANCE MENU

A. Procedure1. Display [MAINTENANCE MENU] on the menu screen and press the MENU/SELECT

key.2. [ENTER PASSWORD] message is displayed.3. Set the first digit of user password with the up key /down key and press the right

key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set up to fourth digit of password.

(The initial setting for user password is [0000].) 5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

B. Exiting• Press the CANCEL key.

9.9.2 PRINT MENU

A. EVENT LOG

B. HALFTONE 64

C. HALFTONE 128

Function • Prints the EVENT LOG.

Use • To check the jams/troubles that occurred, and history of replacing the consumables, etc.The items that can be checked are as follows.

Paper Jam Error : The number of jams occurred and its historyEngine Fatal Error : The history of troubles which caused service callFuser Unit : The history of replacing the fusing unitTransfer Belt : The history of replacing the transfer beltToner Cartridge : The history of replacing the toner cartridgeImaging Unit : The history of replacing the imaging unitTrouble Counter : Troubles counted at each section

Setting/procedure

1. Select [EVENT LOG] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Function • Prints the halftone pattern with 25 % level for CMYK respectively.

Use • To check the unevenness of the density and the pitch.

Setting/procedure

1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALFTONE 64] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.4. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.



Setting/procedure



1


156

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

D. HALFTONE 256

E. GRADATION

9.9.3 ALIGNMENT

A. TOP ADJUSTMENT

B. LEFT ADJUSTMENT



Setting/procedure



Function • Prints the gradation pattern.

Use • To check the gradation reproductively.

Setting/procedure

1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [GRADATION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Function • Adjusts the top margin of media for single-sided printing.

Use • To correct a misaligned print image.PLAIN PAPER : Adjust the head margin of plain paper.THICK1 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 1.THICK2 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 2.THICK3 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 3.ENVELOPE : Adjust the head margin of envelope.TRANSPARENCY: Adjust the head margin of transparency.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TOP ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the

MENU/SELECT key.


-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1

Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for single-sided printing.

Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 1 (manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 5.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [LEFT ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the

MENU/SELECT key.


-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1


157 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

C. LEFT ADJ DUPLEX

D. TRANSFER POWER(1) SIMPLEX PASS

Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for double-sided printing.

Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 1

(manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 5.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [LEFT ADJ DUPLEX] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the

MENU/SELECT key.


-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1

Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the single-sided pages for each media type.

Use • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs.

Adjustment range

• The default setting is 0.“0” (-5 to +5)

Adjustment instructions

To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image), decrease the setting value.To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image), increase the setting value.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [SIMPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.4. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.


158

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) DUPLEX PASS

E. IMG ADJ THICK

F. IMG ADJ BLACK

Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the duplexed pages for each media type.


Adjustment range




Setting/procedure

1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [DUPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/


SELECT key.

Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP fim.

Use • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP film.

Adjustment range



Light color: increase the setting valueDark color: decrease the setting value

Setting/procedure

1. Select [IMG ADJ THICK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

Functions • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black printing.

Use • To vary the density of the printed image of a black printing.

Adjustment range



If the black is light, increase the setting value.If the black is dark, decrease the setting value.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [IMG ADJ BLACK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.


159

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

G. FUSER LOOP ADJ

Functions • To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at envelope printing.

Use • To be used when media wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at envelope printing.

Adjustment range



Adjustment in +: Delay the timing to start fusing loop processingAdjustment in -: Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing

Setting/procedure

1. Select [FUSER LOOP ADJ] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

10. Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

160

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

10. Adjustment item list

* This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced. Priority order, if applicable, during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number.

Replacement part/service job

Adjustment/setting items No Cha

nge

med

ia (

tray

1)

kind

Inst

all l

ower

feed

er u

nit

Inst

all d

uple

x op

tion

Rep

lace

tran

sfer

bel

t uni

t

Rep

lace

PH

uni

t

Rep

lace

mec

hani

cal c

ontr

ol b

oard

Rep

lace

con

trol

ler

boar

d

Rep

lace

IDC

/reg

istr

atio

nse

nsor

/1,2

RE

STO

RE

DE

FAU

LTS

Exe

cute

F/W

upd

ate

ME

NU

QUALITY MENU

CALIBRA-TION

AIDC PROCESS 1

SERVICE MENU

FIRMWARE VERSION

CONTROLLER EW 2 (2)

ENGINE F/W 3 (3)

BOOT F/W 4

ALIGN-MENT

TOP ADJUSTMENT 5 (2)

LEFT ADJUSTMENT 6 (3)

LEFT ADJ DUPLEX 7

Re-entry 8

PH skew adjustment 9 (1)

F/W update 10 (2) (1)

Remounting of parameter chip (PWB-M) 11 (1)

Replace transfer belt unit 12

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 11. SERVICE MENU

161 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

11. SERVICE MENU

11.1 How to enter the SERVICE MENU

NOTE• Make sure not to reveal the password of the service menu to any unauthorized per-

son.

A. Procedure1. Display [SERVICE MENU] on the menu screen and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. [ENTER PASSWORD] message is displayed.3. Set first digit of password with the up key /down key and press the right key .4. Repeat the above procedures to set up to seventh digit of password.

Enter “KMM7450” for service password. Press the MENU/SELECT key.5. Press the MENU/SELECT key.

B. Exiting• Press the CANCEL key.

11.2 Service mode function tree

SERVICE MENU Ref. Page

SERIAL NUMBER P.163

FIRMWARE VERSION

CONTROLLER F/W P.163

ENGINE F/W

BOOT F/W

ALIGNMENT TOP ADJUSTMENT P.163

LEFT ADJUSTMENT P.164

LEFT ADJ DUPLEX P.164

TRANSFER POWER

SIMPLEX PASS P.165

DUPLEX PASS P.165

IMAGE ADJ PARAM P.165

1’ST TRANSFER P.166

ELECTRIFICATION P.166

IMG ADJ THICK P.167

IMG ADJ BLACK P.167

FUSER SPEED HIGH SPEED P.167

LOW SPEED P.168

TEMPERATURE 1 P.168

TEMPERATURE 2 P.169

FUSER LOOP ADJ P.169

MAXIMUM DENSITY P.170

REGISTRATION (CD) P.171

REGISTRATION (FD) P.172

DIAGNOSIS MENU PRINT MENU MAINTENANCE INFO P.173

EVENT LOG P.173

ENG ADJ INFO P.1741

1

11. SERVICE MENU Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

162

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

DIAGNOSIS MENU PRINT MENU ELEMENT PAGE P.174

HALFTONE 64 P.181

HALFTONE 128 P.181

HALFTONE 256 P.181

GRADATION P.181

FUNCTION TRAY1 ADJ-MIN P.181

TRAY1 ADJ-MAX P.182

TONER REPLENISH P.182

PH SKEW ADJ CAUTION STATUS P.182

ADJUSTMENT PRINT P.185

PH REGIST VALUE P.185

RESTORE PASSWORD P.186

SOFT SWITCH SWITCH 1 P.186

SWITCH 2

SWITCH 3

SWITCH 4

SERVICE MENU Ref. Page

1


163 1

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

11.3 SERVICE MENU setting/adjustment

11.3.1 SERIAL NUMBER

11.3.2 FIRMWARE VERSION

11.3.3 ALIGNMENT

A. TOP ADJUSTMENT

Function • Displays the serial number of the printer.

Use • To confirm the printer’s serial number.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [SERVICE MENU] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [SERIAL NUMBER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. The serial number of the printer is displayed.

Function • Displays the version number of the printer firmware.

Use • To use when the firmware is updated. • To confirm the version number of the printer firmware.

CONTROLLER F/W: Firmware of controllerENGINE F/W : Firmware of engineBOOT/F/W : Boot firmware

Setting/procedure

1. Select [FIRMWARE VERSION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired firmware and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Version number of firmware is displayed.

Function • Adjusts the top margin of media for single-sided printing.

Use • To correct a misaligned print image.PLAIN PAPER : Adjust the head margin of plain paper.THICK1 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 1.THICK2 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 2.THICK3 : Adjust the head margin of thick paper 3.ENVELOPE : Adjust the head margin of envelope.TRANSPARENCY: Adjust the head margin of transparency.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TOP ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the

MENU/SELECT key.


-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1

1


164

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

B. LEFT ADJUSTMENT

C. LEFT ADJ DUPLEX

Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for single-sided printing.

Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 1 (manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of media fed from tray 5.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [LEFT ADJUSTMENT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the

MENU/SELECT key.


-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1

Function • Adjusts the left margin of media for double-sided printing.

Use • To correct a misaligned print image.LEFT ADJ TRAY 1: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 1

(manual tray.)LEFT ADJ TRAY 2: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 2.LEFT ADJ TRAY 3: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 3.LEFT ADJ TRAY 4: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 4.LEFT ADJ TRAY 5: Adjust the left margin of duplex print media fed from tray 5.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [LEFT ADJ DUPLEX] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired tray and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired adjustment amount with the up key /down key and press the

MENU/SELECT key.


-30 to +30 (1 step: 0.1 mm)1


165

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

D. TRANSFER POWER(1) SIMPLEX PASS

(2) DUPLEX PASS

E. IMAGE ADJ PARAM

Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the single-sided pages for each media type.


Adjustment range

• The default setting is “0.”-5 to +5



Setting/procedure

1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [SIMPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/


SELECT key.

Functions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the duplexed pages for each media type.


Adjustment range




Setting/procedure

1. Select [TRANSFER POWER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [DUPLEX PASS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/


SELECT key.

Function • Adjusts the printer in case of an image quality problem (uneven density)

Use • To correct image quality problems (uneven density) due to the printer being operated at a high altitude.

Setting/procedure


“0” 1

NOTE• When the setting has been changed, be sure to run a CALIBRATION/AIDC

process.See P.132


166

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

F. 1’st TRANSFER

G. ELECTRIFICATION

Functions • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage.

Use • To use when white spots appeared.

Adjustment range



Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by;Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease)Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value

Setting/procedure

1. Select [1’st TRANSFER] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key .3. Press the MENU/SELECT key to set the adjustment value.

Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern.

NOTE• PC drum memory (94mm pitch) may occur by taking measure to white spots

occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it.Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting.

Functions • To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color after gradation adjust.

Use • Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem

Adjustment range



To make the background level foggier, increase the setting value.To make the background level less foggy, decrease the setting value.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [ELECTRIFICATION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT


SELECT key.


process.See P.132


167

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

H. IMG ADJ THICK

I. IMG ADJ BLACK

J. FUSER SPEED(1) HIGH SPEED

Functions • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP film.

Use • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP film.

Adjustment range



Light color: increase the setting valueDark color: decrease the setting value

Setting/procedure

1. Select [IMG ADJ THICK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT


SELECT key.

Functions • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black printing.

Use • To vary the density of the printed image of a black printing.

Adjustment range



If the black is light, increase the setting value.If the black is dark, decrease the setting value.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [IMG ADJ BLACK] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

Functions • To adjust the speed of the fusing drive motor when the transport speed is 110 mm/s (When feeding plain paper and recycled paper.) so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed.

Use • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental con-ditions or degraded durability.

Variable range

• The default setting is “0.”-20 to +20 (1 step: 0.1 %)


If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [FUSER SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [HIGH SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.


168

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) LOW SPEED

K. TEMPERATURE 1

Functions • To adjust the speed of the fusing drive motor when the transport speed is 110 mm/s (When feeding thick paper, OHP film, envelope, postcard, and labels.) so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed.

Use • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental con-ditions or degraded durability.

Variable range

• The default setting is “0.”-20 to +20 (1 step: 0.1 %)


If brush effect is evident, vary the setting value and check for image.If a blurred image occurs, decrease the setting.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [FUSER SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [LOW SPEED] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.

Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller for each type of media, thereby printing with varying fusing performance under changing environmental con-ditions.

Use • When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of media is changed or environmental conditions change.

• By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print or OHP film can be improved.• By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark or uneven transparencies of

OHP can be reduced.

Adjustment range

• The default setting is 0 °C.

THICK 3 : 0 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)Others :-10 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)


If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.If offset is poor, decrease the setting.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TEMPERATURE 1] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/


SELECT key.


169

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

L. TEMPERATURE 2

M. FUSER LOOP ADJ

Functions • To adjust individually the temperature of the fusing pressure roller for each type of media, thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmen-tal conditions.

Use • When fusing performance is poor, or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of media is changed or environmental conditions change.

• By setting the temperature higher (+), gloss of print or OHP film can be improved.• By setting the temperature lower (-), exit roller mark or uneven transparencies of

OHP can be reduced.

Adjustment range

• The default setting is 0 °C.

THICK 3 : 0 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)Others :-10 °C to +10 °C (1 step: 5 °C)


If fusing performance is poor, increase the setting.If wax streaks occur, decrease the setting.If offset is poor, decrease the setting.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TEMPERATURE 2] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired media type with the up key /down key and press the MENU/


SELECT key.

Functions • To vary the timing to start fusing loop processing and adjust the fusing loop size at envelope printing.

Use • To be used when media wrinkle or transfer misalignment occur at envelope printing.

Adjustment range



Adjustment in +: Delay the timing to start fusing loop processingAdjustment in -: Put ahead the timing to start fusing loop processing

Setting/procedure

1. Select [FUSER LOOP ADJ] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired setting value with the up key /down key and press the MENU/

SELECT key.


170

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

N. MAXIMUM DENSITY

Functions • To adjust gradation, color, and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to media through auxiliary manual fine-adjust-ment of gamma of each color after gradation adjust.

Use • An image quality problem is not corrected even after gradation adjust has been run.

Adjustment range



To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking, increase the setting value.To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking, decrease the setting value.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [MAXIMUM DENSITY] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT


SELECT key.


process.See P.132


171

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

O. REGISTRATION (CD)

Functions • To adjust color shift (CD direction) if it occurs with plain or thick paper.

Use • To correct any color shift.

Adjustment range

• The default setting is “0.”-6 to +6 dot


If the cross deviates in the direction of C, increase the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of D, decrease the setting.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT].

2. Load tray 2 with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8.5 x 11 plain paper.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line

of each color at position Y.5. Select [REGISTRATION (CD)] and press the MENU/SELECT key.6. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.7. Using the up key /down key , change the setting value as necessary.

(At this time, only the line of the selected color moves.)8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.

Check procedure

4039F3C510DB

Y

4039F3C511DB4039F3C512DB

If the cross deviates in the direction of C, decrease the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of D, increase the setting.

Direction of C Direction of D


172

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

P. REGISTRATION (FD)

Functions • To adjust color shift (FD direction) if it occurs with plain or thick paper.

Use • To correct any color shift.

Adjustment range

• The default setting is “0.”-6 to +6 dot


If the cross deviates in the direction of A, increase the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of B, decrease the setting.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT].

2. Load tray 2 with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8.5 x 11 plain paper.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. On the test pattern produced, check for deviation between the black line and the line

of each color at position X.5. Select [REGISTRATION (FD)] and press the MENU/SELECT key.6. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT

key.7. Using the up key /down key , change the setting value as necessary. (At this time,

only the line of the selected color moves.)8. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.

Check Procedure

4039F3C507DA

X

4039F3C508DB 4039F3C509DB

If the cross deviates in the direction of A, decrease the setting.If the cross deviates in the direction of B, increase the setting.

Direction of A Direction of B


173

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

11.3.4 DIAGNOSIS MENU

A. PRINT MENU(1) MAINTENANCE INFO

(2) EVENT LOG

Functions • To produce an output of a list of setting values, adjustment values, total counter val-ues, and others.

Use • To check the maintenance information. The items which can be checked are as follows.

Device Caution Information : Information concerning the device cautionDot Count (total) : Dot count value for each colorCoverage (total) : Coverage rate for each colorReplace count (total) : Number of times IU, TC, transfer belt unit, and fusing

unit have been replaced.Imaging Unit Information : Information concerning the imaging unitToner Cartridge Information: Information concerning the toner cartridge

Setting/procedure

1. Select [MAINTENANCE INFO] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Functions • To print the EVENT LOG.

Use • To check the jams/troubles which occurred, and the history of replacing the consum-ables. The items which can be checked are as follows.

Paper Jam Error : The number of times jam have occurred and its historyEngine Fatal Error : The history of the troubles which required service callFuser Unit : The history of replacing the fusing unitTransfer Belt : The history of replacing the transfer unitToner Cartridge : The history of replacing the toner cartridgeImaging Unit : The history of replacing the imaging unitTrouble Counter : Trouble counting for each section

Setting/procedure

1. Select [EVENT LOG] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

1


174

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(3) ENG ADJ INFO

(4) ELEMENT PAGE

<Engine element data information>

1

Functions • Prints the information concerning the configuration.

Use • To check the adjustment values set by the maintenance menu and service menu.The items which can be checked are as follows.

TOP ADJUSTMENTLEFT ADJUSTMENTLEFT ADJ DUPLEXTRANSFER POWERIMAGE ADJ PARAM1’ST TRANSFERELECTRIFICATIONIMG ADJ THICKIMG ADJ BLACKFUSER SPEEDTEMPERATURE 1TEMPERATURE 2FUSER LOOP ADJMAXIMUM DENSITYREGISTRATION(CD)REGISTRATION(FD)

Setting/procedure

1. Select [ENG ADJ INFO] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Functions • Prints the element information.

Use • To check the element data.• See the attached chart listed below for details.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [ELEMENT PAGE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Element data name Description

INSIDE HUMIDITY • Displays the inside humidity.

ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY • Displays the absolute humidity.

INSIDE TEMPERATURE • Displays the inside temperature.

SENSOR INFORMATION1 • Displays the input port status of the sensors and switches in hexadecimal numbers.

• To be used for troubleshooting when troubles/jams occur.• For allocating bits for SENSOR INFORMATION 1 to 6, see the

attached chart, “Sensor Information List.”See P.177

SENSOR INFORMATION2

SENSOR INFORMATION3

SENSOR INFORMATION4

SENSOR INFORMATION5

SENSOR INFORMATION6

FUSER HEATER1 TEMPERATURE

• Shows the temperature of the heating roller (in 1 ºC increments).• Relevant components: Fusing unit


• Shows the temperature of the fusing pressure roller (in 1 ºC incre-ments).

• Relevant components: Fusing unit


175

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

IDC REGIST SENSOR1 • Shows the IDC bare surface output reading taken last (in 0.01 V increments).

• It should normally be around 4.3 V.• The output range is 0 V to 9.99 V.• “Reading taken last” means: Latest toner density• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit

IDC REGIST SENSOR2

TCR SENSOR C • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).• Standard value: 8 ± 2 %• Relevant components: PH unit, TCR sensor K

TCR SENSOR M

TCR SENSOR Y

TCR SENSOR K • Shows the T/C ratio (in 0.01 % increments).• Standard value: 7 ± 2 %• Relevant components: PH unit, TCR sensor K

VG VOLT C • Shows the grid voltage value of each color of toner when an image is produced.

• Standard values: Around 500 V• A correction is made to make the image lighter when the numeric

value is greater.• A correction is made to make the image darker when the numeric

value is smaller.• Relevant components: Imaging unit, high voltage unit (developing

bias)

VG VOLT M

VG VOLT Y

VG VOLT K

VB VOLT C • Shows the developing bias value of each color of toner when an image is produced.




bias)

VB VOLT M

VB VOLT Y

VB VOLT K

IDC BASE REFLECTION1 • Shows the IDC intensity adjustment value.• It should normally be around 40 and can range from 0 to 255.• The value becomes greater as the transfer belt unit has been

used more.• Relevant components: IDC sensor, transfer belt unit

IDC BASE REFLECTION2

THICKSTOCK VG VOLT C • Displays the grid voltage value of each color when printing the image on the thick paper.




bias)

THICKSTOCK VG VOLT M

THICKSTOCK VG VOLT Y

THICKSTOCK VG VOLT K



176

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT C • Displays the developing bias value of each color when printing the image on the thick paper.




bias)

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT M

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT Y

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT K

MONOCHROME VG VOLT C • Displays the grid voltage value of each color when printing in monochrome.




bias)

MONOCHROME VG VOLT M

MONOCHROME VG VOLT Y

MONOCHROME VG VOLT K

MONOCHROME VB VOLT C • Displays the developing bias value of each color when printing in monochrome.




bias)

MONOCHROME VB VOLT M

MONOCHROME VB VOLT Y

MONOCHROME VB VOLT K

TRANS CURRENT1 • Displays the latest output value for the 1st image transfer.• Range: -1,000 to 2,000 V

TRANS CURRENT2 • Displays the latest output value for the 2nd image transfer.• Range: -1,000 to 4,800 V• Relevant components: Transfer belt unit, high voltage unit (trans-

fer, neutralization)• “TRANS CURRENT2” is not displayed not to print one sheet or

more after the main power switch is turned ON.

REGIST SKEW C • Displays the PH skew adjustment value.

REGIST SKEW M

REGIST SKEW Y



177

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

Sensor information list(SENSOR INFORMATION 1)

(SENSOR INFORMATION 2)

BIT Part nameOperation characteristics

1 0

0 Tray 2 device detection sensor In position Out of position

1 Tray 2 paper empty sensor Paper not present Paper present

2 Tray 2 paper near-empty sensor Blocked Unblocked

3 Set sensor (tray 3) In position Out of position

4 Paper empty sensor (tray 3) Paper not present Paper present

5 Paper near-empty sensor (tray 3) Blocked Unblocked

6 Vertical transport sensor (tray 3) Paper present Paper not present

7 Set Sensor (tray 4) In position Out of position




11 Set sensor (tray 5) In position Out of position




1 0



2 Registration roller sensor Paper present Paper not present

3 Exit sensor Paper present Paper not present

4 Tray 1 lift-up sensor At raised positionNot at raised

position

5 Duplex unit door set sensor Close Open

6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

8 OHP sensor OHP Not OHP

9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10 Paper take-up sensor (tray 3) Paper present Paper not present



13 Fusing loop detect sensor Loop present Loop not present


178

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g




1 0

0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

1 Duplex unit transport sensor1 Paper present Paper not present


3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯


1 0

0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

8 Waste toner full sensor Blocked Unblocked

9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯


179

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g




1 0

0 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor Not retracted Retracted

1 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor Not retracted Retracted

2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

4 Color PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked

5 Color PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked

6 Black PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked

7 Black PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked

8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

11 Lift-up sensor (tray 3) At raised position Not at raised position




1 0

0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

4 Exit full sensor Unblocked Blocked

5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯


180

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

<How to read sensor information>• Convert the numerical value of the hexadecimal number printed on [ELEMENT DATA]

into the binary number, it compares with the allocation of each BIT, and the status of the sensor is confirmed.

ex. When sensor information1 is displayed as 0x0005. 1. Convert four end digits “0005” of 0x0005 into the binary number (14 digits).2. The BIT number is allocated in converted value “00000000000101.”

(BIT0 to BIT13 is sequentially allocated from the first digit.)

3. In this case, because BIT No. “0” and “2” become “1”, so it can be confirmed that the tray 2 device detection sensor is “In position” state and the tray 2 paper near-empty sensor is “Blocked” states from the sensor information table.


Conversion method from hexadecimal number to binary number1. The hexadecimal number (four digits) is converted in each digit based on the following

table.

2. Match the converted numerical value of four digits, then two head digits are excluded and it is assumed the binary number of 14 digits.

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

BIT13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 BIT0

4039F3C522DB

0 0 0 5


1 0

0 Tray 2 device detection sensor In position Out of position


Hexadeci-mal number

Binary number

Hexadeci-mal number

Binary number

Hexadeci-mal number

Binary number

Hexadeci-mal number

Binary number

0 0000 4 0100 8 1000 C 1100

1 0001 5 0101 9 1001 D 1101

2 0010 6 0110 A 1010 E 1101

3 0011 7 0111 B 1011 F 1111


181

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(5) HALF TONE 64

(6) HALF TONE 128

(7) HALF TONE 256

(8) GRADATION

B. FUNCTION MENU(1) TRAY1 ADJ-MIN

Functions • Prints the halftone pattern with 25 % level for CMYK respectively.


Setting/procedure

1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [HALF TONE 64] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select desired color with the up key /down key and press the MENU/SELECT




Setting/procedure





Setting/procedure



Functions • Prints the gradation pattern.

Use • To check the gradation reproductively.

Setting/procedure

1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [GRADATION] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Functions • To set the minimum width for the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide.

Use • Use when the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.

• Use when a false media size is displayed when the tray 1 is used.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TRAY1 ADJ-MIN] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Load the tray 1 with media having a width of 90 mm or 3.55 inches.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.


182

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

(2) TRAY1 ADJ-MAX

(3) TONER REPLENISH

(4) PH SKEW ADJ• This menu will not displayed during error, warming up, and calibration.

<CAUTION STATUS>

Functions • To set the maximum width for the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide.

Use • Use when the manual bypass media size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.

• Use when a false media size is displayed when the tray 1 is used.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TRAY1 ADJ-MAX] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Load the tray 1 with media having a width of 311 mm or 12.25 inches.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.

Functions • To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of prints have been made of origi-nals having a high image density.

Use • When there is a drop in T/C.

Setting/procedure

1. Select [TONER REPLENISH] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select desired color with the up key/down keys and press the MENU/SELECT key.

(Select [ALL COLORS] for supplying toner for all colors at one time.)3. Pressing the MENU/SELECT key will detect the current toner density, and supplies

the toner when the level is lower than the standard. It will then be stirred.4. Operation described on step 3 will be repeated maximum of four times until it

reaches to the standard value. When the value is above the standard, it only stirs.5. [TONER REPLENISH COMPLETED] will be displayed when the toner is normally

supplied.

Functions • Displays the device caution information in hexadecimal number.

Use • To check the device caution information before performing the [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] when adjusting the PH skew.

See P.189

For allocating each bit to the device caution information 1, 2, see the following “Device caution information list.”

Setting/procedure

1. Select [CAUTION STATUS] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. CAUTION STATUS is displayed in hexadecimal number.


183

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

CAUTION STATUS 1

BIT Item Description

0 ⎯ ⎯

1 ⎯ ⎯

2 ⎯ ⎯

3 ⎯ ⎯

4 ⎯ ⎯

5 IDC sensor (front) failure

1

• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 0.5 V or less or 4.3 V or more at output checking during IDC/reg-istration sensor adjustment.

• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 1.9 V or less or 4.4 V or more at density setting during IDC/regis-tration sensor adjustment.

• The output of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (toner pattern on the transfer belt unit) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.

0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-

mal image stabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.

6 Cyan imaging unit failure

1

• All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the transfer belt unit are 0.5 g/m2 (IDC sensor photore-ceiver output) or less during max. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment).

• All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the transfer belt unit are 4.5 g/m2 (IDC sensor photore-ceiver output) or more during max. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment.)

7 Magenta imaging unit failure

8 Yellow imaging unit failure0

• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and nor-mal image stabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.

9 Black imaging unit failure

10 IDC sensor (back) failure

1

• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 0.5 V or less or 4.3 V or more at output checking during IDC/reg-istration sensor adjustment.

• All outputs of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (unprinted surface on the transfer belt unit) are 1.9 V or less or 4.4 V or more at density setting during IDC/regis-tration sensor adjustment.

• The output of sensor photoreceiver section from the detec-tion point (toner pattern on the transfer belt unit) is 1.0 V or less after the adjustment.


mal image dtabilization are complete besides the ones listed above.


184

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

CAUTION STATUS 2

11 Color shift test pattern fail-ure

1

• The number of points detected in the main scan direction is more or less than the specified value during main scan direc-tion registration correction.

• The number of points detected in the sub scan direction is more or less than the specified value during sub scan direc-tion registration correction.



12 Color shift adjust failure

1

• The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction.

• The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction.

• The skew correction amount is greater than the specified value.



13 ⎯ ⎯



0 ⎯ ⎯

1 ⎯ ⎯

2 ⎯ ⎯

3 1st image transfer ATVC (K) failure

1• An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment

of the first image transfer ATVC value of black.

0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, and

ATVC adjustment are normally completed besides the ones listed above.

4 1st image transfer ATVC (color) failure


of the first image transfer ATVC value of color.



5 ⎯ ⎯

6 ⎯ ⎯

7 ⎯ ⎯

8 2nd image transfer ATVC failure


of the second image transfer ATVC value.



9 ⎯ ⎯

10 ⎯ ⎯


185

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

NOTE• Refer to “How to read sensor information” for how to read CAUTION STATUS.

See P.180

<ADJUSTMENT PRINT>

<PH REGIST VALUE>

11 Color PC drum sensor malfunction

1

• The output from the color PC drive main and sub sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1,000 ms while the color PC drum motor is turning stably and the lock signal is active (LOW-0).

0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, color PC

drive main and sub sensors error detection are normally completed besides the ones listed above.

12 Black PC drum sensor malfunction

1

• The output from the black PC drive main and sub sensors remains unchanged for a continuous period of 1,000 ms while the main motor is turning stably and the lock signal is active (LOW-0).

0• Front door open/close, main power switch OFF/ON, black PC

drive main and sub sensors error detection are normally completed besides the ones listed above.

13 ⎯ ⎯


Functions • Image stabilization for PH skew adjustment, and performing the test printing for con-firming the adjustment.

Use • Use for adjustment of PH skew.

Setting/procedure

1. Set the A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.2. Select [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Select [EXECUTE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.4. Pressing the MENU/SELECT key will perform image stabilization and the test print-

ing for confirming the adjustment. (Key operation will be invalid while performing.)

Functions • Displays the adjustment value during PH skew adjustment.

Use • Use for adjustment of PH skew.See P.189

Setting/procedure

1. Select [PH REGIST VALUE] and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Displays adjustment values for Y, M, and C colors.

1


186

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

11.3.5 RESTORE PASSWARD

11.3.6 SOFT SWITCH

• magicolor 7450 II only

Function • Reinitializes the user password used for the “INTERFACE MENU / SYSTEM DEFAULT MENU / MAINTENANCE MENU” set by user.

Use • To reinitialize the user password when the menu cannot be opened even when enter-ing the correct password.

• To reinitialize the user password when the user forgets the password.YES : Initialize passwordNO : Not initialize password

Setting/procedure

1. Select “RESTORE PASSWORD” and press the MENU/SELECT key.2. Select “YES” and press the MENU/SELECT key.3. Return the password set at “INTERFACE MENU / SYSTEM DEFAULT MENU /

MAINTENANCE MENU” to “0000.”

• The default setting is NO.

YES “NO”

1

Function

• Not used.Use

Setting/procedure

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 12. Mechanical adjustment

187

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

12. Mechanical adjustment

12.1 Mechanical adjustment of the tray 1

12.1.1 Adjustment of the tray 1 media size unit

This adjustment must be made in the following case:• The tray 1 media size unit has been removed.

1. Install the gear so that the protrusion of the gear [1] and the mark [3] on the tray 1 guide rack gear [2] are aligned in a straight line.

2. Install the tray 1 unit cover so that part A (edge) [2] of the rack gear [1] for the tray 1 media size unit and part B [3] of the tray 1 unit cover are aligned in a straight line.

[1][3]

[3]

[2]

[2]

4038F3C003DB

[3]

4038F3C004DC

[1]

[2]

12. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

188

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

3. When the tray 1 media size unit base is mounted, align the lever position of the tray 1 media size unit with the tab at the center in a straight line.

4. After the tray 1 media size unit base has been mounted, check that the lever of the tray 1 media size unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the tray 1 guide.

5. Call the SERVICE MENU to the screen and carry out [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNC-TION MENU] → [TRAY1 ADJ-MIN] / [TRAY1 ADJ-MAX]. See P.181

4038F3C512DB

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 12. Mechanical adjustment

189

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

12.2 PH unit mechanical adjustment

12.2.1 Skew adjustment

This adjustment must be made in the following case:• When the PH units are replaced.

1. Turn on the main power switch.2. Select the items described below to display [CAUTION STATUS] on the control panel.

[SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [CAUTION STATUS]

3. Check that Bit number 11 “Color shift test pattern failure”, and Bit number 12 “Color shift adjust failure” on [CAUTION STATUS 1] did not occur.See P.182

4. Set A3 or 11 x 17 media on the tray.(The media to be set depends on the setting on [SYS DEFAULT MENU] → [PAPER] → [UNIT OF MEASURE].)

5. Select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] and output the test pattern.

6. Display [SERVICE MENU]] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [PH REGIST VALUE] and check if the Regist Value is within the specifi-cation.

Specification: within ± 4

4039F3E519DB

Y

M

C

=

=

=

-5

3

-1

PH REGIST VALUE

12. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

190

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

• If either value is out of the specifica-tion, follow the procedures shown below to adjust it to satisfy the specifi-cation.

• If the value of all color, C,M,Y,K, satisfy the specification, proceed to step 11.

7. Open the front door.8. Turn the dkew adjustment dial of the

corresponding PH with flathead screwdriver.

• To the left: When the step value goes - direction

• To the right: When the step value goes + direction

<Adjustment sample>If the yellow value, among the step values confirmed in step 6, is [-5], which means out of the specification, turn the skew adjustment dial of PH (Yellow) to the left (- direction) for 5 clicks.

9. Close the front door and select [SERVICE MENU] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNC-TION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [ADJUSTMENT PRINT] and output the test pat-tern.

10. After ADJUSTMENT PRINT is completed, display [SERVICE MENU]] → [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [PH SKEW ADJ] → [PH REGIST VALUE] again and check if the regist value of each color C,M,Y, is within the specification.

NOTE• Each color’s regist value displayed on [PH REGIST VALUE] changes every time the

image stabilization is conducted. Therefore the value may change even if skew adjustment is not made.

• If either value is out of the specification, repeat step 7 to 10 to continue the adjustment until all CMYK colors satisfy the specification.

11. Finish the adjustment.

4038F3C006DC

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 13. Jam display

191

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

Troubleshooting13. Jam display

13.1 Misfeed display

• When a media misfeed occurs a message is displayed on the control panel.

13.2 Misfeed display resetting procedure

• Open the relevant door, clear the sheet of misfed media, and close the door.

DisplayMisfeed location

Misfeed processing location

ActionLCD 1 LCD 2

PAPER JAM

FUSER/EXIT • Fusing/exit section • Right door (Main body)• Fusing unit

See P.193

SECOND TRANS

• Transfer section • Right door (Main body) See P.194

VERTICAL TRANS

See P.29 of the lower feeder unit service manual.

DUPLEX1 See P.9 of the duplex option service manual.

DUPLEX2

TRAY1 • Tray 1 media feed (Manual feed tray)

• Tray 1• Right door (Main body)

See P.195

TRAY2 • Tray 2 media feed • Tray 2• Right door (Main body)

See P.196

TRAY3 See P.29 of the lower feeder unit service manual.

TRAY4

TRAY5

4039F4E510DB

PAPER JAM

for help

TRAY1

1

1

1

13. Jam display Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

192

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

13.3 Sensor layout

*1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [4].

[1] Exit sensor PC2 [6] Paper take-up sensor (tray 3) PC9

[2] Duplex unit transport sensor 1 PC1 [7] Vertical transport sensor (tray 4) PC8

[3] Duplex unit transport sensor 2 PC2 [8] Take-up sensor (tray 4) PC9

[4]*1 Registration roller sensor PC1 [9] Vertical transport sensor (tray 5) PC8

[4]*1 OHP sensor PC4 [10] Take-up sensor (tray 5) PC9

[5] Vertical transport sensor (tray 3) PC8

4039F4C501DC

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]


193

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

13.4 Solution

13.4.1 Initial check items

• When a media misfeed occurs, first make checks of the following initial check items

13.4.2 Misfeed at fusing/exit section

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Check item Action

• Does media meet product specifications? Change media.

• Is media curled, wavy, or damp. Change media.Instruct user in correct media storage.

• Is a foreign object present along the media path, or is the media path deformed or worn?

Clean or change the media path.

• Are the media separator fingers dirty, deformed, or worn?

Clean or change the defective media separa-tor finger.

• Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or change the defective roll/roller.

• Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at correct position to accommodate media?

Set as necessary.

• Are actuators found operational as checked for correct operation?

Correct or change the defective actuator.

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at fusing/exit section

• PC2 is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the media has blocked the exit sensor (PC2).

• The duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the exit sensor (PC2) has been unblocked by the media during a switchback sequence.

Detection of media left in exit section

• Exit sensor (PC2) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.

Relevant electrical parts

Exit sensor (PC2)Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1)

Duplex control board (PWB-A)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM

Control signalLocation (electri-cal component)

1 Initial check items — —

2 PC2 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-14

3 PC1 I/O check, sensor check —

4 Change PWB-A — —

5 Change PWB-M — —


194

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

13.4.3 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at 2nd image transfer section

• The leading edge of the media does not block the exit sensor (PC2) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the registration roller clutch (CL1) has been energized.

• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after it has been blocked by the media.

Detection of media left in 2nd image transfer section

• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.

• The OHP sensor (PC4) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.

• The exit sensor (PC2) is blocked when the image transfer belt unit is being cleaned.

Misfeed detected as a result of delayed deactiva-tion of sensor

• Registration roller sensor (PC1) does not transmit the media even after the lapse of a given period of time after the media has blocked PC1 at tray 1 feed.

2nd image transfer section loop registration reversing JAM

• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making loop at front of the registration roller when the sensor at front of the registration roller is blocked at media feed.


Registration roller sensor (PC1)Exit sensor (PC2)OHP sensor (PC4)Registration roller clutch (CL1)

Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



2 PC1 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-3 to 4

3 PC2 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNTH2-8 (ON) C-14

4 PC4 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-6 (ON) C-4

5 CL1 operation check PWB-M CNSEN-18 (ON) C-5



195

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

13.4.4 Misfeed at tray 1 media feed section

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at tray 1 media feed section

• The leading edge of the media does not block the registration roller sensor (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 1 feed clutch (CL5) has been energized.

Tray 1 media feed section loop regis-tration reversing JAM

• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at tray 1 feed.


Registration roller sensor (PC1)Tray 1 feed clutch (CL5)


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM




3 CL5 operation check PWB-M CNTRY1-2 (ON) C-9



196

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

13.4.5 Misfeed at tray 2 media feed section

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at tray 2 media feed section

• The leading edge of the media does not block the registration roller sensor (PC1) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 2 media feed clutch (CL2) has been energized.

Tray 2 media feed section loop regis-tration reversing JAM

• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at tray 2 feed.


Tray 2 media feed clutch (CL2)Registration roller sensor (PC1)


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM

Control SignalLocation (electri-cal component)



3 CL2 operation check PWB-M CNLP-13 (ON) C-11


Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 14. Service call message

197

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14. Service call message

14.1 Trouble codes

• The printer’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and service call message on the control panel.

14.1.1 Trouble code list

• For the details of the malfunction codes of the options, see the service manual for the corresponding option.

4039F4E511DB

SERVICE CALL C002M MOTOR 2

Code Item Description

0001 Main motor turning at abnormal timing

• The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.

0018 Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn

• The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.

0019 Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing


001A Color developing motor’s failure to turn

• The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.

001B Color developing motor’s turn-ing at abnormal timing


0040 Suction fan motor’s failure to turn

• The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains sta-tionary.

0043 Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn


0046 Fusing cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn


0048 Fusing cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn


004C Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn


004E Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn


14. Service call message Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

198

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

004F Cooling fan motor 2’s failure to turn


0094 2nd image transfer roller separation

• The 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor doesn’t turn ON (retracting) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure/retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is retracting.

• The 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor doesn’t turn OFF (pressuring) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure/retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is pressuring.

0096 Transfer belt separation • The 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sen-sor doesn’t turn ON (retracting) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st image transfer pressure/retraction clutch has turned ON during the transfer belt unit is retracting.

• The 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sen-sor doesn’t turn OFF (pressuring) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 1st image transfer pres-sure/retraction clutch has turned ON during the transfer belt unit is pressuring.

0301 Polygon motor/C failure to turn • The polygon motor fails to turn stably even after the lapse of a given period of time after activating the polygon motor.

• Motor lock signal detects H for a given period time con-secutively during the polygon motor is rotating.

0302 Polygon motor/M failure to turn

0303 Polygon motor/Y failure to turn

0304 Polygon motor/K failure to turn

0311 Laser malfunction (cyan) • SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time after staring the laser output.

• SOS signal is not detected for a given period of time dur-ing printing or IDC sensor adjustment.

0312 Laser malfunction (magenta)

0313 Laser malfunction (yellow)

0314 Laser malfunction (black)

0500 Heating roller warm-up failure • The heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) and the heating roller thermistor/2 (TH3) fails to raise a given degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the heating roller heater lamp/1 (H1) is turned ON.

• The detected temperature of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower for a given level of degree than one of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) after the front door is opened or closed, the main power switch is turned ON or TROUBLE RESET is implemented.

• The counter value of zero cross signal input is not updated for a given period of time.

0501 Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure

• The fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) fails to raise a given degree of temperature even after the lapse of a given period of time after the fusing pressure heater lamp (H3) is turned ON.

• The detected temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) is lower for a given level of degree than one of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) after the front door is opened or closed, the main power switch is turned ON or TROUBLE RESET is implemented.



199

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

0510 Abnormally low heating roller temperature

• The temperature of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly during ready mode, low power mode or printing.

• The temperature of the heating roller thermistor/2 (TH3) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly during ready mode, low power mode or printing.

0511 Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature

• The temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor /1 (TH2) is lower than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly during ready mode, low power mode or printing.

0520 Abnormally high heating roller temperature

• The temperatures of the heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1) and the heating roller thermistor/2 (TH3) are higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterrupt-edly.

• The feater relay is OFF.

0521 Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature

• The temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly before the heater temperature control starts.

• The temperature of the fusing pressure roller thermistor/1 (TH2) is higher than a given level of degree for 1 second or more uninterruptedly after the heater temperature con-trol starts.

0900 Tray 4 elevator failure See P.33 of the lower feeder unit service manual.

0910 Tray 3 elevator failure

0950 Tray 5 elevator failure

0960 Manual tray rise descent error • The bypass lift-up sensor is not blocked even when the tray 2 vertical transport motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the media lifting plate from the standby position to the feed position was started.

• The bypass lift-up sensor is not unblocked even when the tray 2 vertical transport motor has turned for a given number of pulses after the sequence to move the media lifting plate from the feed position to the standby position was started.

0F30 Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor

• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 5 % or less for a given number of times consecutively.

0F31 Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor

• TC ratio in the developing machine, which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism, is 12 % or more for a given number of times consecutively.

0F32 Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor


0F33 Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor



1


200

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

0F34 Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor


0F35 Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor


0F36 Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor


0F37 Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor


0F3A Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure

• TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly, failing to adjust to an appropriate value.

0F3B Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure

0F3C Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure

0F3D Black TCR sensor adjustment failure

13B0 RTC failure • When correct access to the RTC board is failed during access.

13C8 Transfer unit new article release • A new installation is not detected when a new transfer cleaner unit (transfer belt unit) is installed.

13CA Fusing unit new article release • A new installation is not detected when a new fusing unit is installed.

13D0 Trouble related to security • Contact the responsible people of KONICA MINOLTA before taking some countermeasures.

13D1 Cyan imaging unit EEPROM access error

• The re-written data, which has been read out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as error.

• The error was found when reading out the counter value.13D2 Magenta imaging unit EEPROM

access error

13D3 Yellow imaging unit EEPROM access error

13D4 Black imaging unit EEPROM access error

13D9 Cyan Toner Cartridge EEPROM access error

• The re-written data, which has been read out, checked and founded as error, is read out again and found as error.

• The error was found when reading out the counter value.13DA Magenta toner cartridge

EEPROM access error

13DB Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error

13DC Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error

13E2 Flash ROM write error • Flash ROM writing is found faulty during a check.

3000 Main motor's failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.

C002 RAM (standard) error at startup • RAM error at standard memory is detected during printer start-up.



201

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

*1: After a trouble occurred, an automatic format will be carried out when restarting the printer.

14.2 How to reset

• To reset a malfunction, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

C003 RAM (option) error at startup • RAM error at extension memory is detected during printer start-up.

C013 MAC address error at startup (MAC address is invalid)

• Invalid MAC address is detected during printer start-up.

C015 Boot ROM error at startup • Boot ROM error is detected during printer start-up.

C022 NVRAM access error • Correct access to NVRAM is failed during the printer starting.

C025 Controller ROM error • Lead error of destination setting file is detected during the printer starting.

C026 • Flash ROM access error is detected during the printer starting.

C027 • Final check sum error is detected during the printer start-ing.

C050 HDD access error • When correct access to the hard disk kit is failed during access.

C051*1

HDD full error • Range for user space is full during access to the hard disk kit.

C052 Compact flash access error • When correct access to the compact flash is failed during access.

C053*1

Compact flash full error • Range for user space is full during access to the compact flash.

C054 Compact flash uninstallation • Compact flash is not installed while accessing to the compact flash.

C060 Firmware update error • Firmware update fails to complete correctly during update.

C061 Hold job error/no duplex unit • The duplex option is not installed, but it is required for printing the job held in the HDD.

C062 Hold job error/no tray 3 • Tray 3 is not set when the tray 3 is required for printing of the job hold in HDD.


C064 Hold job error/no memory • Expansion memory is not set when the expansion mem-ory is required for printing of the job hold in HDD.


FFFF Interface communication error • Correct communication is failed when receiving/sending the command between PWB-A and PWB-P.



202

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3 Solution

14.3.1 0001: Main motor turning at abnormal timing

14.3.2 0018: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn

14.3.3 0019: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing


Main motor (M1) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)DC power supply (PU1)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1 M1 operation checkPWB-M CNDM1-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM1-8 (LOCK)

K to L-2


3 Change PU1 — —


Color PC drum motor (M2) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Check the connector of motor for proper connection and correct as necessary.

— —

2Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

— —

3Check the PWB-M connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

— —


C-23



Color PC drum motor (M2) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



C-23



203

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.4 001A: Color developing motor’s failure to turn

14.3.5 001B: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing

14.3.6 0040: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn


Color developing motor (M3) DC power supply (PU1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

— —

3Check the PU1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

— —


— —


C-22




Color developing motor (M3) DC power supply (PU1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1 M3 operation check PWB-M CNDM2-5 (REM)PWB-M CNDM2-8 (LOCK)

C-22




Mechanical control board (PWB-M) Right door assy

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2 Change the right door assy — —



204

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.7 0043: Cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn

14.3.8 0046: Fusing cooling fan motor /1’s failure to turn

14.3.9 0048: Fusing cooling fan motor /2’s failure to turn


Cooling fan motor/1 (M12) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.

— —

3 M12 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-15 (ON)

PWB-M CNDM2-16 (LOCK)C-22



Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (M11) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —


PWB-M CNDM1-14 (LOCK)K to L-1 to 2



Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (M13) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —


PWB-M CNDM1-17 (LOCK)K to L-1



205

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.10 004C: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn

14.3.11 004E: Power supply cooling fan motor’s failure to turn

14.3.12 004F: Cooling fan motor 2’s failure to turn


Ozone ventilation fan motor (M14) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —

3 M14 operation checkPWB-M CNLP-9 (ON)

PWB-M CNLP-11 (LOCK)C-11



Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (M8) DC power supply (PU1)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —

3 M8 operation checkPWB-M CNLV3-2 (ON)

PWB-M CNLV3-3 (LOCK)C-27



Cooling fan motor/2 (M22) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —

3 M22 operation checkPWB-M CNR2FAN-4 (ON)

PWB-M CNR2FAN-6 (LOCK)L-22



206

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.13 0094: 2nd image transfer roller separation

14.3.14 0096: Transfer belt separation


Mechanical control board (PWB-M) Right door assy

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2 Change the right door assy — —



1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor (PC6)1st image transfer pressure/retraction clutch (CL3)

Main motor (M1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Check the M1 connector for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.

— —

2 PC6 I/O check, sensor check — —

3 CL3 operation check PWB-M CNDM1-11 (ON) K to L-2


K to L-2



207

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.15 0301: Polygon motor/C failure to turn

14.3.16 0302: Polygon motor/M failure to turn

14.3.17 0303: Polygon motor/Y failure to turn

14.3.18 0304: Polygon motor/K failure to turn

14.3.19 0311: Laser malfunction (cyan)

14.3.20 0312: Laser malfunction (magenta)

14.3.21 0313: Laser malfunction (yellow)

14.3.22 0314: Laser malfunction (black)


PH unit PH interface board (PWB-D)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

— —

2 Change PH unit — —

3 Change PWB-D — —



PH unit PH interface board (PWB-D)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2 Change PH unit — —

3 Change PWB-D — —



208

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.23 0500: Heating roller warm-up failure

14.3.24 0501: Fusing pressure roller warm-up failure

14.3.25 0510: Abnormally low heating roller temperature

14.3.26 0511: Abnormally low fusing pressure roller temperature

14.3.27 0520: Abnormally high heating roller temperature

14.3.28 0521: Abnormally high fusing pressure roller temperature

14.3.29 0960: Manual tray rise descent error


Fusing unit DC power supply (PU1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).

— —

2Check the fusing unit, PWB-M and PU1 for proper connection and correct or change as necessary.

— —

3 Change fusing unit — —




Tray 1 lift-up sensor (PC14)Vertical transport motor (M2)

Control board (PWB-Z)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the connector of M2 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

— —

3 PC14 I/O check, sensor check PWB-M CNTRY1-10 (ON) C-10

4 M2 operation check PWB-Z PJ5Z PC-5 to 8 Q-22

5 Change PWB-Z — —


209

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.30 0F30: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor

14.3.31 0F32: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor

14.3.32 0F34: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor

14.3.33 0F31: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor

14.3.34 0F33: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor

14.3.35 0F35: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor


Imaging unit /CImaging unit /MImaging unit /YToner supply motor C/K (M6)Toner supply motor Y/M (M7)

Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.

— —

2Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty

— —

3 M6, M7 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6)PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7)

C-22C-23

4 Reinstall imaging unit — —

5 Change imaging unit — —


7 Change PWB-P. — —


Imaging unit /CImaging unit /MImaging unit /Y


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —




5 Change PWB-P — —


210

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.36 0F36: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor

14.3.37 0F37: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor


Imaging unit /KToner supply motor C/K (M7)


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.

— —


— —

3 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-23


5 Change imaging unit /K — —




Imaging unit /K Mechanical control board (PWB-M)Controller board (PWB-P)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the imaging unit if faulty.

— —






211

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.38 0F3A: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure

14.3.39 0F3B: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure

14.3.40 0F3C: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure

14.3.41 0F3D: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure


Imaging unit /CImaging unit /MImaging unit /YToner supply motor Y/M (M6)Toner supply motor C/K (M7)


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2 M6, M7 operation checkPWB-M CNDM2-10 to 13 (M6)PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 (M7)

C-22C-23






Imaging unit /KToner supply motor C/K (M7)


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Clean or correct each contact of the imaging unit if faulty.

— —

2 M7 operation check PWB-M CNDM3-10 to 13 C-23

3 Reinstall imaging unit /K — —

4 Change imaging unit /K — —




212

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.42 13B0: RTC failure

14.3.43 13C8: Transfer unit new article release

14.3.44 13CA: Fusing unit new article release


RTC board (PWB-R) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2 Change PWB-R — —



Mechanical bontrol board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1 Reinstall unit — —



Fusing unit Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).

— —

2Check the fusing unit, PWB-M for proper connection and correct or change as nec-essary.

— —

3 Reinstall fusing unit — —

4 Change fusing unit — —



213

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.45 13D1: Cyan imaging unit EEPROM access error

14.3.46 13D2: Magenta imaging unit EEPROM access error

14.3.47 13D3: Yellow imaging unit EEPROM access error

14.3.48 13D4: Black imaging unit EEPROM access error

14.3.49 13D9: Cyan toner cartridge EEPROM access error

14.3.50 13DA: Yellow toner cartridge EEPROM access error

14.3.51 13DB: Magenta toner cartridge EEPROM access error

14.3.52 13DC: Black toner cartridge EEPROM access error


Imaging unit CImaging unit MImaging unit YImaging unit K


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Clean the connection between the imaging unit and the machine if dirty

— —





Toner cartridge CToner cartridge MToner cartridge YToner cartridge K


Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Clean the connection between the toner cartridge and the machine if dirty

— —

2 Reinstall toner cartridge — —

3 Change toner cartridge — —



214

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.53 13E2: Flash ROM write error

14.3.54 3000: Main motor’s failure to turn

14.3.55 C002: RAM (standard) error at startup

14.3.56 C003: RAM (option) error at startup



Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1 Change PWB-M. — —


Main motor (M1) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)DC power supply (PU1)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

— —


— —


K to L-2




Controller board (PWB-P) Extension memory

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM


1Turn OFF the main power switch of the printer and turn it ON again (Restart of the printer.)

— —

2Check connection state of the extension memory and correct as necessary.

— —

3Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

— —

4 Change the extension memory. — —



215

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.57 C013: MAC address error

14.3.58 C015: BOOT ROM error

14.3.59 C022: NVRAM error

14.3.60 C025, C026, C027: Controller ROM error


Controller board (PWB-P)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —




Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —

3If this error message is displayed after update of firmware, conduct the firmware update procedures again.

— —



216

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.61 C050: Hard disk access error

14.3.62 C051: Hard disk full error


Controller board (PWB-P) Hard disk kit (HDD)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the HDD connector for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.

— —


— —

4 Change HDD — —



Controller board (PWB-P) Hard disk kit (HDD)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the HDD connector for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.

— —

3 Change HDD — —


217

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.63 C052: Compact flash access error

14.3.64 C053: Compact flash full error


Controller board (PWB-P) Compact flash

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the compact flash for proper con-nection and correct as necessary.

— —


— —

4 Change compact flash. — —




Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —

3 Change compact flash. — —


218

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.65 C054: Compact flash uninstallation

14.3.66 C060: Firmware update error



Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —


— —


— —

4 Change compact flash — —




Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the cable that has been used for update of the firmware for proper connec-tion and correct as necessary.

— —

3Check the frmware data and correct as necessary.

— —

4 Update the firmware again. — —


— —



219

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

14.3.67 C061: Hold job error/no duplex unit

14.3.68 C062: Hold job error/no tray 3

14.3.69 C063: Hold job error/no tray 4

14.3.70 C064: Hold job error/no memory

14.3.71 C065: Hold job error/no tray5

14.3.72 FFFF: Interface communication error


Controller board (PWB-P) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Return to the same state as the device configuration when job was held.

— —

3Check the options that are mounted on the printer for proper connection and correct as necessary.

— —


— —

5Delete the job hold in [PROOF/PRINT MENU].

— —


Print control board (PWB-P) Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the PWB-P connector for proper connection and correct as necessary

— —


— —

4Change the cable which the PWB-M and the PWB-P are connected to.

— —

5 Change PWB-M. — —

15. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

220

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

15. Power supply trouble

15.1 Machine is not energized at all (PU1 operation check)


Main power switch (S1)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

DC power supply (PU1)

Step Check itemWIRING

DIAGRAM (Location)

Result Action

1 Is a power voltage supplied across CN1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1?

S to T-2 NO Check the wiring from the wall outlet to S1 CN1PU1.

2 Are the fuses on PU1 conducting ? — NO Change PU1.

3 Is DC3.3 V being output from CN6PU1-1 on PU1?

R-4 NO Change PU1.

4 Is “Low” being output from CN7PU1-2 on PU1?

R-5 NO Check the wiring from the PWB-P to PWB-M to CN1PU1.

5 Is DC24 V being output from CN5PU1-2 on PU1?

R-6 NO Change PU1.

6 Is DC5 V being input to CN5PU1-3 on PU1? R-4 NO Change PU1.

5 Is DC5 V being input to CNPOW-2 on the Control Board? (LED on PWB-M does not blink.)

I-6 NO Change PU1.

YES Change PWB-M

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 15. Power supply trouble

221

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

15.2 Control panel indicators do not light.

15.3 Fusing heaters do not operate


Controller board (PWB-P)Control panel (PWB-OP)



DIAGRAM (Location)

Result Action

1 Is a power voltage being applied across CN1PU1-1 and 2 on PU1 ?

S to T-2 NO Check the wiring from the wall outlet to S1 to CN1PU1.

2 Is the fuse on PU1 conducting ? — NO Change PU1.

3 Is DC3.3 V being output from CN6PU1-1 on PU1?

R-4 NO Change PU1.

4 Is “Low” being output from CN7PU1-2 on PU1?

R-5 NO Check the wiring from the PWB-P to PWB-M to CN1PU1.

5 Is DC5 V being output from CN6PU1-2 on PU1?

R-4 NO Change PU1.

6 Is J22P on PWB-P securely connected ? T-10 NO Reconnect.Check the wiring from the PWB-P to PWB-M.

7 Is CN20P on PWB-OP securely connected ?

V to W-10 NO Reconnect.

YES Change PWB-OP.Change PWB-P.


Primary interlock switch (S2)Fusing unit



DIAGRAM (Location)

Result Action

1 Is the power source voltage applied across CN2PU1-1 to 2 on PU1 ?During this time, the right door should be closed.

S to T-2 NO Check wiring from power outlet to S2 to CN2PU1.

2 Is the power source voltage applied across CN30-1 and 3, or across 2 and 3 ?

U-6 YES Fusing unit

NO Change PU1.

15. Power supply trouble Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

222

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

15.4 Power is not supplied to option

15.4.1 Optional lower feeder unit

15.4.2 Power is not supplied to duplex option


DIAGRAM (Location)

Result Action

1 Is DC24 V being applied to hookup connec-tor CN44-2 ?

O-21 NO Malfunction in lower feeder unit

2 Is DC24 V being output from CNCST-2 on PWB-M ?

I-21 NO Check wiring from PWB-M to CN44 to lower feeder unit.

3 Is DC24 V being output from CN5PU1-2 on PU1 ?

— YES Change PU1.

NO Malfunction in lower feeder unit


DIAGRAM (Location)

Result Action

1 Is DC24 V being output from CN19-2 on Duplex ?

O-19 NO Malfunction in duplex option.

2 Is DC24 V being output from CNDUP-2 on PWB-M ?

I-19 NO Check wiring from PWB-M to CN19 to duplex.

3 Is DC24 V being output from CNCOP-3 on PWB-M ?

— YES Change PU1.

NO Malfunction in duplex option.

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 16. Image quality problem

223

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16. Image quality problem

16.1 How to read element date

• Utilize the element data which is output by selecting [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE] on the SERVICE MENU to specify the cause for the trou-ble.

• For details on element data for each item, see “Adjustment/Setting.”See P.174

4039F4C503DB

Engine Element Data Information

Product Name : magicolor7450

Printer Name : MC7450-******

CONTROLLER F/W : 403930G0080100 (US)

403950G0010001 (US)

403999G0010000

321700001

0x10

ENGINE F/W :

BOOT F/W :

SERIAL NUMBER :

ENGINE OEM CODE :

DATE : 07.04.2008

03:07TIME :

Element Data

INSIDE HUMIDITY 44%

0x1555

0x1c23

0x0c00

0x0100

0x03a0

0x000d

4.62V

4.14V

8.31%

8.54%

8.57%

8.20%

545V

505V

455V

403V

436V

417V

363V

307V

43

41

171 C

171 C

33 C

16g/cm3ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY

INSIDE TEMPERATURE

SENSOR INFORMATION1

SENSOR INFORMATION2

SENSOR INFORMATION3

SENSOR INFORMATION4

SENSOR INFORMATION5

SENSOR INFORMATION6



IDC REGIST SENSOR1

IDC REGIST SENSOR2

TCR SENSOR C

TCR SENSOR M

TCR SENSOR Y

TCR SENSOR K

VG VOLT C

VG VOLT M

VG VOLT Y

VG VOLT K

VB VOLT C

VB VOLT M

VB VOLT Y

VB VOLT K



THICKSTOCK VG VOLT C 544V

403V

436V

417V

363V

307V

403V

403V

307V

307V

307V

307V

+783V

+937V

-4

+2

1

403V

403V

455V

504VTHICKSTOCK VG VOLT M

THICKSTOCK VG VOLT Y

THICKSTOCK VG VOLT K

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT C

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT M

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT Y

THICKSTOCK VB VOLT K

MONOCHROME VG VOLT C

MONOCHROME VG VOLT M

MONOCHROME VG VOLT Y

MONOCHROME VG VOLT K

MONOCHROME VB VOLT C

MONOCHROME VB VOLT M

MONOCHROME VB VOLT Y

MONOCHROME VB VOLT K

TRANS CURRENT1

TRANS CURRENT2

REGIST SKEW C

REGIST SKEW M

REGIST SKEW Y

16. Image quality problem Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

224

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.2 How to identify problematic part

• This chapter is divided into two parts: “Initial check items” and “Solution.”• When an image quality problem occurs, first go through the “Initial check items” and, if

the cause is yet to be identified, go to “Solution.”


• Let the machine produce a test print and determine whether the image problem occurs in a specific mono color or four colors

• Evaluation procedure

4039F4C505DB

4 colors

Mono color

Image problem

Action Result Cause Next step

Lines, bands From [Service Menu], select [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [GRADATION], and produce a test print. Is image problem evident in each of all four colors?

YES 4 colors P.239

NO Mono color P.225


225

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3 Solution

16.3.1 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction

A. Typical faulty images

B. Troubleshooting procedure

A02EF4C507DA

White lines in sub scan direction

White bands in sub scan direction

Colored lines in sub scan direction

Colored bands in sub scan direction

Step Section Check Item Result Action

1 Imaging unit The surface of the PC drum is scratched.

YES Change imaging unit.

2 Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.

3 Contact terminals make good con-nection between each IU and machine.

NO Clean contact terminals.

4 Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection.

NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-minal position.

5 PH unit The surface of the PH window is dirty.

YES Clean with cleaning jig.

6 The problem has been eliminated through the checks of steps up to 5.

NO Change imaging unit.→ Change transfer belt unit.→ Change PH unit.


226

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.2 Monocolor: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction



A02EF4C508DA

White lines in main scan direction

White bands in main scan direction

Colored lines in main scan direction

Colored bands in main scan direction





3 Contact terminals make good con-nection between each IU and machine.

NO Clean contact terminals.

4 Developing bias contact terminal makes good connection.

NO Clean contact terminal and check ter-minal position.




NO Change imaging unit.→ Change transfer belt unit.→ Change PH unit.


227

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.3 Monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction



1

A02EF4C521DA


1 High image density original

Uneven density in sub scan direc-tion occurs at a pitch of 40 mm to 50 mm when a multi-print cycle is run using an original with high image density (50% or more).

YES Feed 10 to 20 blank sheets of media with no originals placed, as the IU fails to keep up with a high demand for toner.






5 Transfer belt unit

Cam gear operates properly. NO Change transfer belt unit.


NO Change IU.→ Change PH unit.→ Change controller board.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).


228

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.4 Monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction



1

A02EF4C520DA







4 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt makes positive contact with plates on rails.

NO Check and correct contacts.

5 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change transfer belt unit.


NO Change imaging unit.→ Change PH unit.→ Change high voltage unit(Image transfer, neutralizing).


229

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.5 Monocolor: low image density



A02EF4C516DA

ABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDE


1 [SERVICE MENU] →[DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE]

Check data for Vg and Vdc.Color Vdc: Around 400 V

Vg : Around 500 VBlack Vdc: Around 400 V

Vg : Around 500 V

NO Go to next step.

2 Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.

3 IDC output value is around 4.3 V.

NO Clean IDC sensor.Check transfer belt unit for damage.

4 Element data check results

Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 8.

5 Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 13.

6 TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 8.

7 TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 13.

8 Imaging unit Dirty on the outside. YES Clean.

9 PH unit The surface of the PH win-dow is dirty.


10 TCR sensor window The color TCR sensor win-dow on the LED assy is dirty.

YES Clean.

11 Transfer belt unit Transfer belt makes positive contact with plates on rails.

NO Check and correct contacts.

12 Cam gear operates properly. NO Change transfer belt unit.

13 Hopper unit Connectors are loose. YES Reconnect.

14 Gear is cracked. YES Change gear.

15 [SERVICE MENU] →[DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [FUNCTION MENU] → [TONER REPLENISH]

Toner is properly supplied when TONER REPLENISH is run.

NO Go to next step.


230

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [MAXIMUM DENSITY]

The problem has been elimi-nated through the adjust of MAXIMUM DENSITY.

NO Go to next step.

17 The problem has been elimi-nated through the checks of steps up to 16.

NO Change imaging unit.→ Change controller board→ Change PH unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).



231

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.6 Monocolor: gradation reproduction failure



A02EF4C522DA





3 TCR Sensor window TCR sensor window is dirty. YES Clean.


IDC output value is around 4.3 V.

NO Clean IDC sensor. Check transfer belt unit for damage.



NO Go to next step.




232

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.7 Monocolor: foggy background



A02EF4C510DA

ABCDABCDABCDABCDABCD



Check data for Vg and Vb.Color Vdc: Around 400 V

Vg : Around 500 VBlack Vdc: Around 400 V

Vg : Around 500 V

NO Go to next step.

2 Check TCR data. NO Go to next step.

3 IDC output value is around 4.3 V.

NO Clean IDC sensor.Check transfer belt unit for damage.

4 Element data check results

Low TCR and low Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 8.

5 Low TCR and high Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 11.

6 TCR falling within specified range and low Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 8.

7 TCR falling within specified range and high Vg and Vdc

YES Go to step 11.




10 TCR sensor window The color TCR Sensor win-dow is dirty.

YES Clean.

11 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [ELECTRIFICATION]

The problem is eliminated after ELECTRIFICATION has been adjusted.

NO Go to next step.



NO Go to next step.


233

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g





234

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.8 Monocolor: void areas, white spots



A02EF4C523DA

Void areas White spots


1 Image check There are void areas at the front side or high density section.

YES See P.229

2 There is void area at the rear side section.

YES Perform [TRANSFER POWER]/[1’ST TRANSFER] under Service Menu.




5 Toner cartridge Foreign matter or caked toner in the toner cartridge.

YES Remove foreign matter.


235

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.9 Monocolor: colored spots



A02EF4C524DA

AAAA


1 Imaging unit Developing bias contact ter-minal makes good connec-tion.

NO Clean contact terminal and check terminal position.

2 The surface of the PC drum is scratched.




236

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.10 Monocolor: blurred image



A02EF4C511DA






NO Change imaging unit.→ Change PH unit.


237

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.11 Monocolor: blank print, black print



A02EF4C518DA

Blank print Black print


1 Image check A blank print occurs. YES Check PH unit connector for proper connection.

2 Imaging unit Coupling of IU drive mecha-nism is installed properly.

NO Check and correct drive trans-mitting coupling. Change IU.

3 The PC drum charge corona voltage contact or PC drum ground contact of the imag-ing unit is connected prop-erly.

NO Check, clean, or correct the contact.

4 High voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing)

Connector is connected properly.

NO Reconnect.

5 The problem has been elimi-nated through the check of step 4.

NO Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).→ Change controller board→ Change PH unit.


238

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.12 Monocolor: uneven image



A02EF4C525DA


1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color is surely installed.

NO Re-install it.

2 PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.

NO Re-install it.

3 Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 mm pitch.

YES Replace the PH unit holder.

4 Toner cartridge There is any stain or break-age on the drive section of the toner cartridge.

YES Clean/replace the toner cartridge.

5 Imaging unit There is any stain, damage or abrasion on the PC drum.

YES Replace the imaging unit.

6 Transfer roller There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the transfer roller.

YES Replace the transfer roller.

7 Fusing unit There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the roller and drive section of the fusing unit.

YES Replace the fusing unit.


NO Replace the transfer belt.


239

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.13 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in sub scan direction



A02EF4C507DA

White lines in sub scan direction

White bands in sub scan direction

Colored bands in sub scan direction

Colored lines in sub scan direction


1 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the transfer belt unit.

YES Clean with specified solvent. (See Maintenance.)

2 Transfer belt unit is dirty or scratched.

YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.

3 Cleaning blade is not effec-tive in removing toner com-pletely.

YES Clean cleaning blade.Change transfer belt unit.

4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.

YES Change transfer roller.

5 Media path There is foreign matter on media path.


6 Image transfer media sepa-rator fingers are damaged or dirty.

YES Clean or change.

7 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty or damaged.

YES Clean.Change fusing unit.

8 Fusing media separator fin-gers are dirty.

YES Clean.


NO Change controller board


240

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.14 4-Color: white lines, white bands, colored lines, colored bands in main scan direction



A02EF4C508DA

White lines in main scan direction

White bands in main scan direction

Colored lines in main scan direction

Colored bands in main scan direction


1 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the Transfer belt unit.



YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change transfer belt if belt is damaged.

3 Cleaning blade is not effec-tive in removing toner com-pletely.

YES Clean cleaning blade.Change transfer belt unit.





6 Image transfer media sepa-rator fingers are damaged or dirty.


7 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty or damaged.

YES Clean.Change fusing unit.

8 Fusing media separator fin-gers are dirty.

YES Clean.

9 Neutralizing brush The resistance values between the neutralizing brush and the ground termi-nal is not ∞.

NO Check the contact.Change neutralizing brush.


NO Change controller board


241

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.15 4-Color: uneven density in sub scan direction



A02EF4C526DA



YES Clean with specified solvent.(See Maintenance.)

2 Transfer belt is dirty or scratched.


3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.

4 Transfer roller Transfer roller is installed properly.

NO Reinstall.

5 Transfer roller is dirty or scratched.



NO Change transfer belt unit.


242

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.16 4-Color: uneven density in main scan direction



A02EF4C521DA



YES Clean with specified solvent.(See Maintenance.)

2 Transfer belt is dirty or scratched.


3 Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.


NO Reinstall.




NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).


243

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.17 4-Color: low image density



A02EF4C516DA

ABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDEABCDE


1 Media Media is damp. YES Change media to one just unwrapped from its package. Install media dehumidifying heater.

2 Transfer belt unit Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.


NO Reinstall.


NO Change transfer roller.

5 IDC sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.



NO Go to next step.


NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change controller board→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).


244

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.18 4-Color: poor color reproduction



A02EF4C527DA



2 Transfer belt unit Terminal is dirty. YES Clean.


NO Reinstall.


NO Change transfer roller.

5 IDC sensor Sensor is dirty. YES Clean with blower brush.



NO Go to next step.


NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change controller board→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).


245

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.19 4-Color: incorrect color image registration



A02EF4C512DA

AAAAAA


1 Machine condition Vibration is given to the machine after main power switch has been turned ON.

YES Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.




YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth. Change transfer belt unit if belt is damaged.

4 Drive coupling to the machine is dirty.

YES Clean.




NO Reinstall.



8 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [FUSER SPEED]

Brush effect or blurred image occurs.

YES Readjust fusing transport speed.

9 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] → [REGISTRATION]

Check the specific color in which color shift occurs.

YES Perform “REGISTRATION.” If color shift is not corrected even with a correction of ± 1 dot, go to next step.


NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change controller board


246

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.20 4-Color: void areas, white spots



A02EF4C523DA

Void areas White spots


1 Image check There are void areas at the front side or high density section.

YES See P.244

2 There are void areas in the trailing edge.

YES Perform [TRANSFER POWER]/[1’ST TRANSFER] under Service Menu.




YES Clean dirty belt with a soft cloth.Change transfer belt unit is damaged.



6 Charge neutralizing cloth is not separated and ground terminal is connected prop-erly.

NO Correct or change.



8 Pre-image transfer guide plate is damaged or dirty.





247

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.21 4-Color: colored spots



A02EF4C509DA

AAAA












6 Fusing unit Fusing belt is dirty or scratched.

YES Change fusing unit.




248

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.22 4-Color: poor fusing performance, offset



A02EF4C528DA

C FC FC F

C FC F

OffsetPoor fusing performance


1 Media Media type does not match. YES Change the setting.

2 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] →[TEMPERATURE1/2]

Changing fusing tempera-ture eliminates the problem of poor fusing performance and offset.

YES Readjust fusing temperature.


NO Change fusing unit.


249

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.23 4-Color: brush effect, blurred image



A02EF4C529DA

Blurred imageBrush effect



2 Media type does not match. YES Change the setting.

3 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is dirty.

YES Clean.

4 Fusing belt is dirty or scratched.


5 [SERVICE MENU] →[ALIGNMENT] →[FUSER SPEED]

Changing fusing speed elimi-nates the problem of brush effect and blurred image.

YES Readjust fusing transport speed.


250

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.24 4-Color: back marking



A02EF4C530DA

AAAA


1 Transfer roller Transfer roller is scratched or dirty.




3 Fusing unit Fusing entrance guide plate is scratched or dirty.


4 Lower fusing roller is scratched or dirty.


5 Transfer belt unit Fingerprints, oil, or other for-eign matter is evident on the Transfer Belt.



NO Change transfer belt unit.→ Change high voltage unit (Image transfer, neutralizing).


251

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

16.3.25 4-Color: uneven image



A02EF4C525DA


1 Toner cartridge The toner cartridge of every color is surely installed.

NO Re-install it.

2 PH unit The PH unit is surely installed.

NO Re-install it.

3 Uneven pitch occurs in 3.0 mm pitch.

YES Replace the PH unit holder.

4 Toner cartridge There is any stain or break-age on the drive section of the toner cartridge.

YES Clean/replace the toner car-tridge.

5 Imaging unit There is any stain, damage or abrasion on the PC drum.

YES Replace the imaging unit.

6 Transfer roller There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the transfer roller.

YES Replace the transfer roller.

7 Fusing unit There is any stain, damage, deformation or abrasion on the roller and drive section of the fusing unit.

YES Replace the fusing unit.


NO Replace the transfer belt.


252

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Tro

ub

lesh

oo

tin

g

Blank Page

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 17. Parts layout drawing

253

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

Appendix17. Parts layout drawing

17.1 Main body

17.1.1 Engine section

[1] IDC/registration sensor/2 (SE2) [6] Controller board (PWB-P)

[2] IDC/registration sensor/1 (SE1) [7] DIMM/0 (WORK0)

[3] Control panel (PWB-OP) [8] RTC board (PWB-RTC)

[4] PH interface board (PWB-D) [9] Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

[5] DC power supply (PU1) [10] High voltage unit (HV1)

4039F5C501DB

[1][10]

[9]

[8]

[7]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

17. Parts layout drawing Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

254

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

[1] Fusing drive motor (M4) [7] Cooling fan motor/1 (M12)

[2] Main motor (M1) [8] Toner supply motor Y/M (M6)

[3] Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (M11) [9] Cooling fan motor/2 (M22)

[4] Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (M8) [10] Toner supply motor C/K (M7)

[5] Ozone ventilation fan motor (M14) [11] Color PC drum motor (M2)

[6] Color developing motor (M3) [12] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (M13)

4039F5C502DB

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[7]

[6]

[8][9]

[10]

[11] [12]


255

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

[1] Right door switch (S5) [6] Front door switch/2 (S4)

[2] Primary interlock switch (S2) [7] Main erase lamp/Y (LA4)

[3] PH unit [8] Main erase lamp/M (LA3)

[4] Main power switch (S1) [9] Main erase lamp/C (LA2)

[5] Front door switch/1 (S3) [10] Main erase lamp/K (LA1)

4039F5C503DB

[3]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[10]

[9]

[8]

[7]


256

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

[1] Developing clutch/K (CL4) [8] Waste toner full sensor (PC8)

[2] Exit sensor (PC2) [9] Color PC drive main sensor (PC17)

[3] Temperature/humidity sensor (SE3) [10] Color PC drive sub sensor (PC18)

[4] Registration roller sensor (PC1) [11] Black PC drive main sensor (PC15)

[5] OHP sensor (PC4) [12] Black PC drive sub sensor (PC16)

[6] 1st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor (PC6)

[13] 1st image transfer pressure/retraction clutch (CL3)

[7] Registration roller clutch (CL1) [14] Exit full sensor (PC19)

4039F5C504DB

[5]

[3]

[1][14][2]

[4]

[6][8]

[10]

[9]

[7]

[12] [13]

[11]


257

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

17.1.2 Tray 1 / Tray 2

[1] Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) [7] Tray 2 paper empty sensor (PC10)

[2] Tray 1 lift-up sensor (PC14) [8] Tray 2 CD paper size sensor (PC9)

[3] Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL5) [9] Tray 2 paper size board (PWB-I)

[4] Tray 1 pick-up solenoid (SL2) [10] Tray 2 paper near-empty sensor (PC11)

[5] Tray 1 paper empty sensor (PC13) [11] Tray 2 device detection sensor (PC12)

[6] Tray 1 paper size VR (UN1)

4039F5C505DB[8]

[11]

[10]

[9]

[1][2]

[3][4]

[5]

[6]

[7]


258

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

17.2 Lower feeder unit (option)

[1] Vertical transport motor (M2) [8] Control board (PWB-Z)

[2] Door set sensor (PC5) [9] CD paper size sensor/1 (PC4)

[3] Vertical transport sensor (PC8) [10] Set sensor (PC2)

[4] Paper take-up sensor (PC9) [11] CD paper size sensor/2 (PC3)

[5] Paper empty sensor (PC6) [12] Lift-up motor (M3)

[6] Lift-up sensor (PC7) [13] Paper near-empty sensor (PC1)

[7] Paper size board (PWB-I) [14] Paper feed motor (M1)

4039F5C506DB

[3]

[4]

[6][5]

[14][1] [2]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10][11]

[12] [13]


259

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

17.3 Duplex option (option)

[1] Duplex unit switchback motor (M1) [4] Duplex unit transport sensor 2 (in PWB-A) (PC2)

[2] Duplex unit door set sensor (PCI) [5] Duplex control board (PWB-A)

[3] Duplex unit transport motor (M2) [6] Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (in PWB-A) (PC1)

4038F5C512DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

18. Connector layout drawing Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

260

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

18. Connector layout drawing

No. CN No.Location in the wiring diagram


[1] CN32 E-13 to 14 [8] CN9 E-2

[2] CN30 U-6 [9] CN28 E-9

[3] CN31 U-6 [10] CN27 E-9

[4] CN56 E-17 to 18 [11] CN22 E-9

[5] CN55 E-15 to 16 [12] CN29 E-10

[6] CN7 E-27 [13] CN13 O-18 to 19

[7] CN44 O-21 [14] CN19 O-19

DescriptionNumber of pin Possible to confirm by removing external cover.

Not possible to confirm by removing external cover.

➀

1

4039F5C507DB

[3]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5][6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12][13] [14]

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 18. Connector layout drawing

261

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix



[1] CN14 K-2 [10] CN18 E-12

[2] CN8 D-8 [11] CN17 E-20

[3] CN6 E-4 to 5 [12] CN39 E-22

[4] CN3 E-21 [13] CN59 K-2

[5] CN43 E-11 [14] CN42 K-22

[6] CN21 E-8 [15] CN38 E-12

[7] CN4 E-8 [16] CN45 K-2

[8] CN5 D-8 [17] CN41 K-1

[9] CN40 E-11

4039F5C508DB

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[6][7]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[12]

[13]

[15][14]

[16] [17]

[8]

1

19. Timing chart Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

262

ma

gic

olo

r 7

45

0/7

45

0II

Ap

pe

nd

ix

19. Timing chart

19.1 Main body

Print request received

4038F5E514DB

Main motor (M1)

Polygon motor

Color PC drum motor (M2)

Color developing

motor (M3)

2nd image transfer

pressure/retraction

motor (M5)

1st image transfer

pressure/retraction

Fusing drive motor (M4)

LD compulsion

luminescence

Color developing bias AC

Black developing bias AC

Image write start signal

Video data (Y)

Video data (M)

Video data (C)

Video data (K)

Main erase lamp/C (LA2)

Main erase lamp/Y (LA4)

Main erase lamp/M (LA3)

Main erase lamp/K (LA1)

Drum charge corona bias

(Y/M/C/K)

Developing bias DC

(Y/M/C/K)

1

SERVICE MANUAL

2008.08Ver. 2.0

FIELD SERVICE

Lower feeder unit









1

1

11

2008/08 2.0 Error corrections



1

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itO

utlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g


i

CONTENTS

Lower feeder unit

Outline1. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1

Maintenance2. Periodical check ...................................................................................................... 3

2.1 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts).................................................. 3

2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller ..................................................................... 3

2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller ............................................................................... 5

2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller........................................................................... 9

3. Other ..................................................................................................................... 12

3.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .......................................................... 12

3.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)............................................... 13

3.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list ................................................................. 13

3.2.2 Cleaning parts list ....................................................................................... 13

3.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure ...................................................................... 14

3.3.1 Rear right cover/rear left cover.................................................................... 14

3.3.2 Right rear cover........................................................................................... 14

3.3.3 Control board (PWB-Z) ............................................................................... 15

3.3.4 Paper size board (PWB-I) ........................................................................... 16

3.3.5 Lift-up motor (M3) ....................................................................................... 18

3.3.6 Paper feed motor (M1) ................................................................................ 18

3.3.7 Vertical transport motor (M2) ...................................................................... 20

3.4 Cleaning procedure ............................................................................................ 21

3.4.1 Feed roller/pick-up roller ............................................................................. 21

3.4.2 Separation roller.......................................................................................... 23

3.4.3 Transport roller ............................................................................................ 24

Adjustment/Setting4. How to use the adjustment section ....................................................................... 25

5. Sensor check......................................................................................................... 26

5.1 Check procedure ................................................................................................ 26

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itO

utlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gField Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

ii

Troubleshooting6. Jam display ........................................................................................................... 29

6.1 Misfeed display................................................................................................... 29

6.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ........................................................... 29

6.2 Sensor layout...................................................................................................... 30

6.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 31

6.3.1 Initial check items ....................................................................................... 31

6.3.2 Misfeed at tray 3 to 5 feed, tray 3 to 5 vertical transport section................. 32

7. Trouble code ......................................................................................................... 33

7.1 Trouble code display........................................................................................... 33

7.2 Trouble code list.................................................................................................. 33

7.3 Solution .............................................................................................................. 34

7.3.1 0900: Tray 4 elevator failure........................................................................ 34




1

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itO

utlin

e

Outline1. Product specificationsA. Type

B. Paper type

C. Machine specifications

D. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main body.


Name Paper Take-Up Cabinet

Type Front loading type 1 way paper take-up device

Installation Desk type

Document Alignment Center

Type Plain paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)

Recycled paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)

Size A5R to A3, 5.5 × 8.5R to 11 × 17

Capacity Plain Paper

(80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)

500 sheets

Power Requirements DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)

DC 5 V ± 5 %

Max. Power Consumption

12 W or less

Dimensions 380 mm (W) × 485 mm (D) × 178 mm (H)15.0 inch (W) × 19.1 inch (D) × 7.0 inch (H)

Weight 14.8 kg (32.6 lb)


2

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itO

utlin

e

Blank Page


3

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

Maintenance2. Periodical check

2.1 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)

NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of the lower feeder

unit for magicolor 7450. The same procedure is applicable to the lower feeder unit for magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.

2.1.1 Replacing the separation roller

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Separation roller: 300,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Slide out the tray.2. Open the vertical transport door.

3. Remove two tabs [1], and remove the vertical transport door [2].

1

1

[1]

[2]

4039F2C048DB


4

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the jam clearing cover [2].

NOTE• Make sure the position of the mylar

when installing the jam clearing cover.

5. Remove two screws [1] and the sep-aration roller installation plate assy [2].

6. Remove two C-rings [1] and the shaft [2], and remove the separation roller fixing plate assy [3].

NOTE• Use care not to miss the spring [4].

[1][1]

[2]

OK NG

4039F2C049DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C013DB

4038F2C508DB

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[4]


5

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

7. Remove the C-ring [1] and guide [2], and remove the separation roller [3].

2.1.2 Replacing the feed roller

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Feed roller: 300,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Remove the separation roller installation plate assy.• See the procedures 1 to 5 in “Separation roller assy.”

See P.3

2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the right rear cover [2].


4038F2C559DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

1

[1]

[2]

4039F2C050DB

[1]4039F2C051DB


6

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the reinforcement plate [2].

5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed roller assy [2].

6. Remove two screws [1] and the Installation flame [2] of the separa-tion roller installation plate assy.

[1][2]

4067F2C501DB

[1]

[1][2]

4067F2C502DB

[1]

[1]

[2]4067F2C503DB


7

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

7. Remove two screws [1] and feed roller cover [2].

8. Remove the C-ring [1] and bushing [2].

9. Remove the C-ring [2] and gear [3] while sliding out the shaft assy [1] in the direction indicated in left figure.

[1]

[2]

4067F2C504DB

[2]

[1]4067F2C505DB

[1]

4067F2C506DB

[2]

[3]


8

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

10. Remove the C-ring [1] and bushing [2], and remove the shaft assy [3].

11. Remove two E-rings [1] and bushing [2], and remove the pick-up roller fix-ing plate assy [3].

12. Remove the C-ring [1] and feed roller [2].

[2]

[1]

[3] 4067F2C507DB

4067F2C508DB

[1][1]

[2]

[3]

4067F2C509DB

[1]

[2]


9

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

2.1.3 Replacing the pick-up roller

A. Periodically replacing parts/cycle• Pick-up roller: 300,000 prints

B. Procedure1. Remove the separation roller installation plate assy.• See the procedures 1 to 5 in “Separation roller assy.”

See P.3

2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the right rear cover [2].


4. Remove the screw [1] and remove the reinforcement plate [2].

1

[1]

[2]

4039F2C050DB

[1]4039F2C051DB

[1][2]

4067F2C501DB


10

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

5. Remove four screws [1] and remove the feed roller assy [2].

6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the separation eoller installation plate assy [2] together with frame.

7. Remove two screws [1] and feed roller cover [2].

8. Remove two C-rings [1] and two bushings [2], and remove the pick-up roller assy [3].

[1]

[1][2]

4067F2C502DB

[1]

[1]

[2]4067F2C503DB

[1]

[2]

4067F2C504DB

4067F2C510DB

[1]

[2]

[2]

[3]


11

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

9. Snap off the C-ring [1], and remove the pick-up roller [2].

4067F2C511DB

[1]

[2]


12

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3. Other














D. Removal of PWBs






13

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)




1

Exterior parts

Rear right cover P.14

2 Rear left cover P.14

3 Right rear cover P.14

4Board and etc.

Control board P.15

5 Paper size board P.16

6

Others

Lift-up motor P.18

7 Paper feed motor P.18

8 Vertical transport motor P.20


1

Paper feed section

Feed roller P.21

2 Pick-up roller P.21

3 Separation roller P.23

4 Transport section Transport roller P.24


14

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce


NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of the lower feeder

unit for magicolor 7450. The same procedure is applicable to the lower feeder unit for magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.

3.3.1 Rear right cover/rear left cover

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the rear right cover [2].

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2].

3.3.2 Right rear cover

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the right rear cover [2].

1

[1]

[1]

[2]

4039F2C052DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C053DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C050DB


15

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3.3.3 Control board (PWB-Z)

1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].

2. Remove the harness [2] from two wire saddles [1].

3. Remove all the connectors on the control board.

[1][2]

4039F2C054DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C055DB

4039F2C056DB


16

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the control board [2].

3.3.4 Paper size board (PWB-I)

1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the metal blanking plate [2].

2. Remove the harness [2] from the edge cover [1].

[1]

[1]

[2]

4039F2C057DB

[1][2]

4039F2C054DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C058DB


17

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the control board assy [2].

4. Remove two tabs [1] and the con-nector [2], and remove the paper size board assy [3].

5. Remove the lever [1], and remove the paper size board [2].

[1][2]

4067F2C512DB

[1]

[2] [3]4067F2C513DB

4067F2C514DB

[1]

[2]


18

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3.3.5 Lift-up motor (M3)

1. Pull out the tray.2. Remove the rear right cover.

See P.143. If the optional paper feed cabinet is mounted, remove it.

4. Remove two screws [1], and remove the reinforcement plate [2].

5. Disconnect the connector [1].6. Remove three screws [2], and

remove the lift-up motor [3].

3.3.6 Paper feed motor (M1)

1. Pull out the tray.2. Remove the rear right cover and the rear left cover.

See P.14


[1]

[2]

4038F2C165DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

4038F2C166DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C165DB


19

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

4. Remove the harness of the motor assy [2] from five wire saddles [1].


6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the motor assy [2].

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the paper feed motor [2].

[1]

[2] [3]

4038F2C167DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C168DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C519DB


20

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3.3.7 Vertical transport motor (M2)

1. Pull out the tray.2. Remove the rear right cover and the rear left cover.

See P.14


4. Remove the harness of the motor assy [2] from five wire saddles [1].


6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the motor assy [2].

[1]

[2]

4038F2C165DB

[1]

[2] [3]

4038F2C167DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C168DB


21

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

7. Remove two screws [1], and remove the vertical transport motor [2].


NOTE• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.

3.4.1 Feed roller/pick-up roller

1. Slide out the tray.2. Open the vertical transport door.


[2]

[1]

4038F2C520DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C048DB


22

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce





6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the feed roller [1] and the pick-up roller [2].

[1][1]

[2]

OK NG

4039F2C049DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C013DB

[2]

[1]

4038F2C179DC


23

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

3.4.2 Separation roller

1. Slide out the tray.2. Open the vertical transport door.






[1]

[2]

4039F2C048DB

[1][1]

[2]

OK NG

4039F2C049DB

[1]

[2]

4038F2C013DB


24

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itM

ain

ten

an

ce

6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the separation roller [1].

3.4.3 Transport roller

1. Open the vertical transport door.

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport roller [1].

4038F2C523DB

[1]

[1] 4039F2C059DA

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 4. How to use the adjustment section

25

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itA

dju

stm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

Adjustment/Setting4. How to use the adjustment section• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce-

dures for this machine.• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.

Advance checksBefore attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if:

• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.• The power supply is properly grounded.• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current

intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,

direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.• The density is properly selected.• Correct paper is being used for printing.• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly

replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.• Toner is not running out.

Caution• Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job

procedures.• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use

utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit.• Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be

extremely hot.• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring

instruments away from it.• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.

5. Sensor check Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

26

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itA

dju

stm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

5. Sensor check

5.1 Check procedure

• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main body in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).

<Procedure>1. Set to the SERVICE MENU.• For displaying the SERVICE MENU, see “Adjustment/Setting” in the main body service

manual.See P.161

2. Select [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE].3. Select [PRINT] and press Menu/Select key.4. Sensor Information will be displayed at “SENSOR INFORMATION 1, 2 and 5” in hexa-

decimal number on the printed element information page.5. Check the Sensor status according to the bit allocation chart below.

A. Allocating the Bit(SENSOR INFORMATION 1)


1 0

0 Tray 2 set sensor In position Out of position






6 Tray 3 vertical transport sensor Paper present Paper not present








Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 5. Sensor check

27

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itA

dju

stm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g




1 0



2 Registration roller sensor Paper present Paper not present

3 Exit sensor Paper present Paper not present

4 Tray 1 lift-up sensor At raised positionNot at raised

position

5 Duplex unit door set sensor Close Open

6 — — —

7 — — —

8 OHP sensor OHP Not OHP

9 — — —

10 Tray 3 paper take-up sensor Paper present Paper not present



13 Fusing loop detect sensor Loop present Loop not present


1 0

01st image transfer pressure/retraction position sensor

Not retracted Retracted

1 2nd image transfer pressure position sensor Not retracted Retracted

2 — — —

3 — — —

4 Color PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked

5 Color PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked

6 Black PC drive main sensor Blocked Unblocked

7 Black PC drive sub sensor Blocked Unblocked

8 — — —

9 — — —

10 — — —

11 Lift-up sensor (tray 3) At raised positionNot at raised

position


position


position


28

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itA

dju

stm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

Blank Page


29

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g


6.1 Misfeed display


6.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure

• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.

DisplayMisfeed Location


ActionLCD 1 LCD 2

PAPER JAM

TRAY3• Tray 3 take-up• Vertical conveyance

• Tray 3• Tray 3 right door

See P.32TRAY4• Tray 4 take-up• Vertical conveyance


TRAY5• Tray 5 take-up• Vertical conveyance


4039F4E513DB

PAPER JAM

for help

TRAY 3


30

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

6.2 Sensor layout

[1] Registration roller sensor (PC1) [5] Tray 4 Paper take-up sensor (PC9)

[2] Tray 3 Vertical transport sensor (PC8) [6] Tray 5 Vertical transport sensor (PC8)

[3] Tray 3 Paper take-up sensor (PC9) [7] Tray 5 Paper take-up sensor (PC9)

[4] Tray 4 Vertical transport sensor (PC8)

4039F4C502DB

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]


31

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

6.3 Solution


• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.

Check item Action

• Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.

• Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

• Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or worn?

Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.

• Are the paper separator fingers dirty, deformed, or worn?

Clean or replace the defective paper separator finger.

• Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.

• Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper?

Set as necessary.

• Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.


32

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

6.3.2 Misfeed at tray 3 to 5 feed, tray 3 to 5 vertical transport section

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at tray 3 to 5 feed section

• The leading edge of the paper does not block the vertical transport sen-sor (PC8) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper feed motor (M1) has been energized.

Detection of misfeed at tray 3 to 5 vertical trans-port section

• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the vertical transport sensor (PC8).

• Vertical transport sensor (PC8) does not transmit the paper even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked PC8.

Tray 3 to 5 vertical transport section loop reg-istration reversing JAM

• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at feed.

Detection of paper left in tray 3 to 5

• Vertical transport sensor (PC8) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-function is reset.

• Paper take-up sensor (PC9) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or mal-function is reset.


Paper take-up sensor (PC9)Vertical transport sensor (PC8)Registration roller sensor (PC1)Paper feed motor (M1)

Control board (PWB-Z)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



2 PC9 I/O check, sensor check PWB-Z PC PJ6Z PC-8 (ON) V-22

3 PC8 I/O check, sensor check PWB-Z PC PJ6Z PC-11 (ON) V-22


5 M1 operation check PWB-Z PC PJ5Z PC-1 to 4 Q-22



Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 7. Trouble code

33

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

7. Trouble code

7.1 Trouble code display

• The printer’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that, on detecting a malfunction, gives the corresponding malfunction code and service call message on the control panel.

7.2 Trouble code list

• To reset a malfunction, turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.

4039F4E514DB

SERVICE CALL 0910TRAY3 LIFT


0900 Tray 4 elevator failure • The lift-up sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.



7. Trouble code Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

34

Lo

we

r fe

ed

er

un

itT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

7.3 Solution

7.3.1 0900: Tray 4 elevator failure




Lift-up sensor (PC7)Lift-up motor (M3)

Control board (PWB-Z)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM



— —

2Check the connector of M3 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

— —

3 PC7 I/O check, sensor check PWB-Z PJ6Z PC-3 (ON) V-21 to 22

4 M3 operation check PWB-Z PJ4Z PC-4 to 5 Q-24


SERVICE MANUAL

2008.08Ver. 2.0

FIELD SERVICE

Duplex option









1

1

11

2008/08 2.0 Error corrections



1

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nO

utlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g


i

CONTENTS

Duplex option

Outline1. Product specifications ............................................................................................. 1

Maintenance2. Other ....................................................................................................................... 3

2.1 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items ............................................................ 3

2.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (Other parts) ................................................ 4

2.2.1 Disassembly/assembly parts list ................................................................... 4

2.2.2 Cleaning parts list ......................................................................................... 4

2.3 Disassembly/assembly procedure ........................................................................ 4

2.3.1 Duplex unit .................................................................................................... 4

2.4 Cleaning procedure .............................................................................................. 5

2.4.1 Transport roller/roll 1, 2 ................................................................................. 5

2.4.2 Transport roller/roll 3 ..................................................................................... 6

2.4.3 Ventilation section ......................................................................................... 6

Adjustment/Setting3. How to use the adjustment section ......................................................................... 7

4. Sensor check........................................................................................................... 8

4.1 Check procedure .................................................................................................. 8

Troubleshooting5. Jam display ............................................................................................................. 9

5.1 Misfeed display ..................................................................................................... 9

5.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ............................................................. 9

5.2 Sensor layout ...................................................................................................... 10

5.3 Solution............................................................................................................... 11

5.3.1 Initial check items........................................................................................ 11

5.3.2 Duplex unit pre-registration section misfeed ............................................... 12

5.3.3 Duplex unit transport section misfeed ......................................................... 13

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nO

utlin

eM

ain

ten

an

ce

Ad

justm

en

t /

Se

ttin

gT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

gField Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008

ii

Blank Page


1

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nO

utlin

e

Outline1. Product specificationsA. Type

B. Paper type

C. Machine specifications

D. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main unit


Name Duplex Unit

Type Switchback and Circulating Duplex Unit

Installation Mounted on the right side door of main body

Document Alignment Center

Type Plain paper 64 to 256 g/m2 (17 to 68 lb)

Size A5R to A3 Wide, 5.5 × 8.5R to 12 × 18

Print paper size width 139.7 to 311.1 mm (5.5 × 12.25 inch)

length 148.0 to 457.2 mm (5.75 × 18 inch)

Power Requirements DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main unit)

DC 5 V ± 5 % (supplied from the main unit)

Dimensions 110 mm (W) × 440 mm (D) × 345 mm (H)4.25 inch (W) × 17.25 inch (D) × 13.5 inch (H)

Weight 3.0 kg (6.5 lb)


2

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nO

utlin

e

Blank Page


3

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nM

ain

ten

an

ce

Maintenance2. Other














D. Removal of PWBs






4

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nM

ain

ten

an

ce

2.2 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (Other parts)




NOTE• The following procedure mainly uses photos and illustrations of the duplex option

for magicolor 7450. The same procedure is applicable to the duplex option for magicolor 7450II unless otherwise noted.

2.3.1 Duplex unit

1. Release the tab [1], and remove the connector cover [2].


1

No Section Part name Ref. page

1 Duplex option Duplex unit P.4

No. Section Part name Ref. page

1

Duplex option

Transport roller/roll 1, 2 P.5

2 Transport roller/roll 3 P.6

3 Cleaning ventilation section P.6

1

4066F2C507DB

[1] [2]

4066F2C508DB

[1]


5

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nM

ain

ten

an

ce

3. Open the duplex unit door [1].4. Remove two screws [2], and remove

the duplex unit [3].


NOTE• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the

isopropyl alcohol.

2.4.1 Transport roller/roll 1, 2

1. Open the duplex unit door [1].2. Using a soft cloth dampened with

alcohol, wipe the transport roller/roll 1 [2], 2 [3] clean of dirt.

4066F2C509DB

[2]

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[3] 4039F2C045DB


6

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nM

ain

ten

an

ce

2.4.2 Transport roller/roll 3

1. Remove the duplex unit.See P.4

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport roller/roll 3 [1] clean of dirt.

2.4.3 Ventilation section

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the outside of the venti-lation section [1] clean of dirt.

2. Open the duplex unit door [1].3. Using a soft cloth dampened with

alcohol, wipe the inside of the venti-lation section [2] clean of dirt.

4066F2C504DB

[1]

[1]4039F2C046DB

[1]

[2]

4039F2C047DB

Field Service Ver. 2.0 Aug. 2008 3. How to use the adjustment section

7

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nA

dju

stm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

Adjustment/Setting3. How to use the adjustment section• “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and proce-

dures for this machine.• Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting,” the default settings are indicated by “ ”.

Advance ChecksBefore attempting to solve the customer problem, the following advance checks must be made.Check to see if:

• The power supply voltage meets the specifications.• The power supply is properly grounded.• The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current

intermittently (e.g., elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise).• The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature, high humidity,

direct sunlight, ventilation, etc.; levelness of the installation site.• The original has a problem that may cause a defective image.• The density is properly selected.• Correct paper is being used for printing.• The units, parts, and supplies used for printing (developer, PC drum, etc.) are properly

replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life.• Toner is not running out.

Caution• Be sure to unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job

procedures.• If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON, use

utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit.• Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be

extremely hot.• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. Keep watches and measuring

instruments away from it.• Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device.• Do not touch IC pins with bare hands.


8

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nA

dju

stm

en

t /

Se

ttin

g

4. Sensor check

4.1 Check procedure

• To allow sensors to be checked for operation easily and safely, data applied to the IC on the board can be checked on the panel with the main body in the standby state (including a misfeed, malfunction, and closure failure condition).

<Procedure>1. Set to the SERVICE MENU.• For displaying the SERVICE MENU, see “Adjustment/Setting” in the main body service

manual.See P.161

2. Select [DIAGNOSIS MENU] → [PRINT MENU] → [ELEMENT PAGE].3. Select [PRINT] and press Menu/Select key.4. Sensor Information will be displayed at “SENSOR INFORMATION 3” in hexadecimal

number on the printed element information page.5. Check the Sensor status according to the Bit allocation chart below.

A. Allocating the Bit(SENSOR INFORMATION 3)


1 0

0 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯



3 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

4 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

5 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

6 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

7 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

8 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

9 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

10 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

11 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

12 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯

13 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯


9

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g


5.1 Misfeed display


5.1.1 Misfeed display resetting procedure

• Open the corresponding door, clear the sheet of paper misfeed, and close the door.

DisplayMisfeed location


ActionLCD 1 LCD 2

PAPER JAM

DUPLEX1 • Duplex transport section

• Duplex Option door

P.13

DUPLEX2 • Duplex pre-registration section

P.12

4039F4E512DB

PAPER JAM

for help

DUPLEX1


10

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

5.2 Sensor layout

[1] Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) [3] Registration roller sensor (PC1)

[2] Duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2)

4066F4C501DB

[1]

[2]

[3]


11

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

5.3 Solution


• When a paper misfeed occurs, first perform the following initial check items.

Check item Action

• Does paper meet product specifications? Replace paper.

• Is the paper curled, wavy, or damp? Replace paper.Instruct the user on the correct paper storage procedures.

• Is a foreign object present along the paper path, or is the paper path deformed or worn?

Clean the paper path and replace if necessary.

• Are the paper separator fingers dirty, deformed, or worn?

Clean or replace the defective paper separator finger.

• Are rolls/rollers dirty, deformed, or worn? Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.

• Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the correct position to accommodate the paper?

Set as necessary.

• Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator.


12

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

5.3.2 Duplex unit pre-registration section misfeed

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at duplex pre-registration section

• The registration roller sensor (PC1) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the duplex paper take-up sequence started.

Duplex unit pre-registra-tion section loop registra-tion reversing JAM detection

• Rise timing of load for registration is earlier than the one for making the loop at front of the registration roller at pre-registration take-up.


Registration roller sensor (PC1) Duplex control board (PWB-A)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM

Control signalLocation (electri-cal components)


2 PC1 I/O, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-4

3 PWB-A replacement — —

4 PWB-M replacement — —


13

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

5.3.3 Duplex unit transport section misfeed

A. Detection timing

B. Action

Type Description

Detection of misfeed at duplex transport section

• The duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) is not blocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is blocked by the paper.

• The duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) is blocked by the paper.

• The duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) is not unblocked even after the set period of time has elapsed after the duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) is blocked by the paper.

Detection of paper remaining in the duplex unit transport section

• The duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1) or duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2) are blocked when the main power switch is set to ON, a door or cover is opened and closed, or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.


Registration roller sensor (PC1)Duplex unit transport sensor 1 (PC1)Duplex unit transport sensor 2 (PC2)Duplex unit switchback motor (M1)Duplex unit transport motor (M2)

Duplex control board (PWB-A)Mechanical control board (PWB-M)

Step Action

WIRING DIAGRAM

Control signalLocation (electri-cal components)


2 PC1 I/O, sensor check PWB-M CNSEN-3 (ON) C-4

3 PC1 I/O, sensor check — U-18

4 PC2 I/O, sensor check — U-18

5 M1 operation check PWB-A PJ4A-1 to 4 V-19

6 M2 operation check PWB-A PJ5A-1 to 4 V-19

7 PWB-A replacement — —

8 PWB-M replacement — —


14

Du

ple

x o

ptio

nT

rou

ble

sh

oo

tin

g

Blank Page

POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE#110 WITH HOUSING

20 20-L

EXTRA LARGECLOSED END CONNECTORS

LOCATION

DESCRIPTION

DESTINATION

MEDIUM

SMALLCLOSED END CONNECTORS

POSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE


OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

#250 WITH HOUSING

#187 WITH HOUSING

INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH

INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

DC24V

OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH

CLOSED END CONNECTORS

DC5V

HIGH OR LOWINPUT OF ACTIVEHIGH OR LOWOUTPUT OF ACTIVE

CLOSED END CONNECTORSLARGE

28

281 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

272625242322212019181716151413121110987654321

M

L

K

J

I

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Z

Y Y

Z

X

W

V

U

T

S

R

Q

P

O

N

A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

4039-B001-1AAug.2008

13 2

1 32CN

42

M22

_LO

CK

M22

ON

GN

DC

oolin

g F

an M

otor

/2

M22

GR

R GR

GY

GR

8 12111094 765321

CNR2FAN

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

GN

D

NC

GN

DN

C

CNTM

NC

24610 8

PWB-OPControl Panel

CN2OP

123567 4910 8

TUBE

GR

PI

Y OR

OR

PI

YGY

GY

W

79 5 3 1

J22P

CNCF

CF_CARDCompact Flash Card

Bat

tery

1 3 2

J15P

1 91922

94 18418393

J4P

Memory Module(DIMM)DIMM1

NC

J28P

(Option)(Expansion)

DIMM0Memory Module(DIMM)

J6P93 183

18494

2 92911

J27P

NCNC

J26P

1 49502

2 50

Hard DiscHDD

PJ01HDD

491

J13P

cassettes or moreIn case of two add-on paper

From the lower cassette

GY

PH Unit/K

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PH Unit/C

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PH Unit/MPH Unit/Y

NC

17

N1

1

Imag

ing

Uni

t/Y

Imag

ing

Uni

t/M

Imag

ing

Uni

t/C

Imag

ing

Uni

t/K

T2

T1

Mechanical Control BoardPWB-M

DC

5VS

OS

_LO

W_Y

SO

S_Y

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_Y

GN

DS

/H_Y

1

DC

5VS

/HB

_Y2

S/H

_Y2

LD_E

N_Y

S/H

B_Y

1

GN

DD

C24

VN

C

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_M

GN

DS

OS

_MD

C5V

SO

S_L

OW

_M

S/H

B_M

2S

/H_M

2LD

_EN

_MS

/HB

_M1

S/H

_M1

DC

5V NC

NC

DC

5V

S/H

_C1

S/H

B_C

1LD

_EN

_CS

/H_C

2S

/HB

_C2

SO

S_L

OW

_CD

C5V

SO

S_C

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_C

GN

D

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_K

GN

DS

OS

_KD

C5V

SO

S_L

OW

_K

S/H

B_K

2S

/H_K

2LD

_EN

_KS

/HB

_K1

S/H

_K1

DC

5V NC

DC

24V

GN

D

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

GN

D

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

M2-

DU

M1-

DU

GN

DD

C24

VG

ND

DC

24V

4th

GR

ID_P

WM

2nd

GR

ID_P

WM

2nd

P.C

._R

EM

*2

1st G

RID

_PW

M3r

d G

RID

_PW

M1s

t P.C

._R

EM

*2

GY

GY

GY

D.B

. _C

LK *

61s

t D.B

._A

C_R

EM

*6

2nd_

I.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

11s

t D.B

._D

C_P

WM

*6

1st I

.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

1

I.T._

RE

M *

11s

t I.T

._P

WM

*1

1st I

.T./2

nd I.

T_R

EM

*1

2nd

I.T._

PW

M *

1

3rd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

4th

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

GN

DG

ND

DC

24V

DC

24V

D.B. : Developing Bias

*6

I.T. : Image Transfer

*1

P.C. : Photo Conductor

*2

*3

TXD : Transmission Data

*4

RXD : Reception Data

CW/CCW : Clock Wise/Counter Clock Wise

*5

NC

DC

5VD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_B

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NA

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NB

DU

P_S

ET

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_B

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_A

DU

P_R

EV

_PD

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_EN

BD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_E

NA

GN

DD

C24

VD

UP

_CO

VE

R_O

PD

UP

_FE

ED

_PS

DU

P_E

XIT

_PS

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_AD

UP

_FE

ED

_PD

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Rig

ht D

oor

Sw

itch

Fro

nt D

oor

Sw

itch/

1

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/K

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/C

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/M

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/Y

I.T. U

nit *

1

Fus

ing

Driv

e M

otor

Col

or P

C D

rum

Mot

or

Ton

er S

uppl

y M

otor

C/K

Col

or D

evel

opin

g M

otor

2nd

Imag

e T

rans

fer

2nd

Imag

e T

rans

fer

Exi

t Sen

sor

Hea

ting

Rol

ler

The

rmis

tor/

2

Hea

ting

Rol

ler

The

rmis

tor/

1

Fus

ing

Pre

ssur

e R

olle

r T

herm

isto

r/1

Fus

ing

Pre

ssur

e R

olle

r T

herm

isto

r/2

Hea

ting

Rol

ler

The

rmis

tor/

3

GN

DD

C24

V

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_KP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_K

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_K

NC

DC

5V

S/H

_K1

S/H

B_K

1LD

_EN

_KS

/H_K

2S

/HB

_K2

SO

S_L

OW

_KD

C5V

SO

S_K

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_K

GN

D

NC

19

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_C

GN

DS

OS

_CD

C5V

SO

S_L

OW

_C

S/H

B_C

2S

/H_C

2LD

_EN

_CS

/HB

_C1

S/H

_C1

DC

5VN

CP

olyg

on_R

EM

_CP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_C

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_C

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3G

ND

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

DC

SIC

_TX

D *

3C

SIC

_RX

D *

4G

ND

GN

DA

TD

C_M

ON

_KD

C24

VA

TD

C_C

ON

T_K

GN

DA

TD

C_M

ON

_CD

C24

VA

TD

C_C

ON

T_C

GN

DA

TD

C_M

ON

_MD

C24

VA

TD

C_C

ON

T_M

PW

B-I M

4

M7

M6

SIZ

E4

GN

D

SIZ

E3

SIZ

E2

14 15 1716

PC

11 O

N

PC

12 O

N GN

D

8

PC

10 O

N SIZ

E1

LED

_RE

M

PC

9 O

N

12 13

GN

D

11109

LED

_RE

M

GN

D

LED

_RE

M

LED

_RE

M

GN

D

4 765321

CNMP

PC9

Tra

y 2

CD

Pap

er S

ize

Sen

sor

PC10

Tra

y 2

Pap

er E

mpt

y S

enso

r

2 1

PJ1

6 32 13

PJ1

5

5 4 3

432

6

1

CN

9

1

6

2

5

PJ3

8 3 12 3

PJ3

9 12

Tra

y 2

Dev

ice

Det

ectio

n S

enso

r

PC12

Tra

y 2

Pap

er N

ear-

Em

pty

Sen

sor

PC11T

ray

2 P

aper

Siz

e B

oard

PW

B-I

SIZ

E4

2

GN

D

1

SIZ

E1

SIZ

E3

SIZ

E2

5 34

PJ1I

PW

B-I

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CNSEN

1 2 3 5 6 74

LED

_RE

M

LED

_RE

M

DC

5V

GN

D

SE

1 V

O1

9 10 11

SE

1_R

EF

1312

SE

2 V

O1

GN

D

SE

2 V

O2

DC

5V

8

SE

1 V

O2

PC

1 O

N

PC

4 O

N

16 171514

DC

5VG

ND

DC

24V

SE

2_R

EF

18

CL1

ON

CN

20 151413

2 13

9 10 11

567

5 6 7

91011

8

8

21 3

1415 13

4

12

12

4161718

16 17 18

181716

18 17 16 4

12

12

4

1315 14

31 2

8

8

11 10 9

765

7 6 5

11109

3 12

13 14 15

CN

6

2 1345

PJ1

2

PC4PC12 1

PJ1

1 32 13

PJ1

0

OH

P S

enso

r

Reg

istr

atio

n R

olle

r S

enso

r

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

IDC

/Reg

istr

atio

n S

enso

r /1

SE1 SE2

IDC

/Reg

istr

atio

n S

enso

r /2

PJ1

3 5 4 3 12

1 2

2 1CN

24

CL1

1814 15 17168 12 1311109

DC

24V

4 765321

CNHV2

19

19

CN2HV1

123567 49101113 12 81617 15 1418

CNHV1

DC

24V

GN

DG

ND

4th

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

3rd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

4th

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

3rd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd

I.T._

PW

M *

11s

t I.T

./2nd

I.T

_RE

M *

11s

t I.T

._P

WM

*1

I.T._

RE

M *

1

1st I

.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

11s

t D.B

._D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd_

I.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

11s

t D.B

._A

C_R

EM

*6

D.B

. _C

LK *

6

DC

5VS

E3

ON G

ND

SE

3 O

NM

10 O

N

NC

M10

_LO

CK

GN

D

1st P

.C._

RE

M *

23r

d G

RID

_PW

M1s

t GR

ID_P

WM

2nd

P.C

._R

EM

*2

2nd

GR

ID_P

WM

4th

GR

ID_P

WM

DC

24V

GN

DD

C24

V

1 2 3 5 6 74

GN

D

9 10 11 13128 16 171514 18

810 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CN1HV1

4

1CN

21 1 2 3

4 3 2

Reg

istr

atio

n R

olle

r C

lutc

h

(W)

R(W

)

R(W

)

(W)

Hig

h P

ress

ure

2nd

I.T. *

1

Hig

h P

ress

ure

1st I

.T. *

1

CN

4

2 1

321

3

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

3

1 2 3

12CN

5

234

321

CN

8

1

4

SE34 3 12

PJ2

6

Tem

pera

ture

/Hum

idity

Sen

sor

M10

Suc

tion

Fan

Mot

orG

YG

Y

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Y GR

GY

GY

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_EN

AD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_E

NB

DU

P_R

EV

_PD

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_A

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_B

NC

DU

P_S

ET

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NB

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NA

DU

P_F

EE

D_P

DD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_A

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_BD

C5V

NC

DU

P_E

XIT

_PS

DU

P_F

EE

D_P

SD

UP

_CO

VE

R_O

PD

C24

V

19

CNDUP

123567 4

GN

D

9101113 12 81617 15 1418

4

4 3 12

8

8

11109

7 6 5

765

11 10 9

31 2CN

13

CN

19

21 3 5 6 7

567 2 134

4

CN

15

15 14 13 91011 5678 2 13412161718

18 17 16 12 4 3 128 7 6 511 10 9131415

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

DC

24V

SL2

ON

LED

_RE

MG

ND

PC

14 O

N

PC

13 O

NGN

DLE

D_R

EM

CL5

ON

CNTRY1

1 2 3 5 6 74

DC

24V

9 108

1 2

2 1CN

27 4

1CN

22 1 2 3

4 3 2 CN

28

12

21

Tra

y 1

Lift-

Up

Sen

sor

3

PJ1

8 12

PC14SL2

Tra

y 1

Pic

k-U

p S

olen

oid

PC132 1

PJ1

7 3

Tra

y 1

Pap

er E

mpt

y S

enso

r

CL5

Tra

y 1

Pap

er F

eed

Clu

tch

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

21 3

31 2

CN

29

DC

4.7V

321

CNTRY2

UN

1 O

N GN

D

UN1

Tra

y 1

Pap

er S

ize

VR

Y GR

GY

PU1DC Power Supply

141516 81213 11 10 9

NC

47 6 5 3 2 1

CNLP

NC

NC

CL2

ON

DC

24V

GN

DP

C8

ON

M14

ONG

ND

M14

_LO

CK

DC

24V

CL4

ON

LED

_RE

MG

ND

PC

6 O

NLE

D_R

EM

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CN

40 2 1

321

3

1 2

2 1

CN

43

PC82 3

PJ4

1 1

Was

te T

oner

Ful

l Sen

sor

CL2

Tra

y 2

Pap

er F

eed

Clu

tch

M14

Ozo

ne V

entil

atio

n F

an M

otor

4

1

CN

18

1 2 3

4 3 2

1 2

2 1

CN

38

Pos

ition

Sen

sor

1

PJ3

7 32

PC6

Dev

elop

ing

Clu

tch/

K

CL4

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

8 11109

*

4 765321

*T

H4

ON G

ND

TH

5 O

N

TH

1 O

NGN

DT

H2

OND

C5V

GN

D

GN

D

CNTH1 CNTH2

LED

_RE

MG

ND

PC

2 O

NDC

5VG

ND

TH

3 O

ND

C5V

_OU

T

1 2 3 5 6 74

DC

5V_I

N

8

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

181716

18 17 16 4

12

12

4

1315 14

31 2

8

8

11 10 9

765

7 6 5

11109

3 12

13 14 15

CN

32

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

19

19

GY

1 2

2 1CN

36

TH4 TH5

CN

37

12

21

5 4 3

432

6

1

CN

34

1

6

2

5

TH2 TH1

4

1CN

35 1 2 3

4 3 2

PC22 13

PJ1

9

TH3

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

8 1211109

GN

D

4 765321

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4

GN

DC

SIC

_TX

D *

3C

SIC

_RX

D *

4G

ND

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

CNCI1

4

12

12

431 2

8

8

11 10 9

765

7 6 5

11109

3 12CN

55

2 13

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/MP

WB

-E

PW

B-E

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/Y

3 12

PW

B-E

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/C

3 12

PW

B-E

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/K

3 12

PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GN

DP

C16

ON

LED

_RE

MG

ND

PC

3 O

N

M5

ON

PC

7 O

NGN

DLE

D_R

EM

PC

15 O

NLE

D_R

EM

GN

DP

C18

ON

LED

_RE

M

GN

DLE

D_R

EM

PC

17 O

NGN

D

19

CNPC

1 2 3 5 6 74

LED

_RE

M

9 10 11 13128 16 171514 18 20

GN

DG

Y

4

12

12

431 2

8

8

11 10 9

765

7 6 5

11109

3 12CN

17

4

431 2

8

8765

7 6 5 3 12CN

3

PC182 1

PJ2

4 3

Col

or P

C D

rive

Sub

Sen

sor

Bla

ck P

C D

rive

Mai

n S

enso

r

3

PJ2

1 12

PC15

Col

or P

C D

rive

Mai

n S

enso

r

3

PJ2

3 12

PC17

Bla

ck P

C D

rive

Sub

Sen

sor

3

PJ2

2 12

PC16

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PC72 1

PJ2

3

Pre

ssur

e P

ositi

on S

enso

r

Fus

ing

Loop

Det

ect S

enso

r

3

PJ1

12

PC3 M512

PJ3

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Pre

ssur

e/R

etra

ctio

n M

otor

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

NC

M3_

RE

MD

C5V

GN

DG

ND

DC

24VA A

M3_

H/L

M3_

LOC

KM

3_C

LK

BBG

ND

M12

ON

CNDM2

123567 4

M12

_LO

CK

9101113 12 816 15 14

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/1

M12

3

1 2 3

12

CN

39

M6

Ton

er S

uppl

y M

otor

Y/M

321 4

PJ5

93 6 7 84 51 2

M3

PJ6

81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CNDM3

B B

M2_

CLK

M2_

LOC

KM

2_H

/LAA

DC

24V

GN

DG

ND

DC

5VM

2_R

EMNC

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ8

M221 54 8763 941 2 3

M7

PJ7

PJ2

0

M4321 4

B B A A

CNSM

1234

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

2 1

CNMT

**(B

L)(W

)

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GN

DN

CN

CN

CLA

1 O

N GN

D

LA4

ON G

ND

LA3

ON G

ND

LA2

ON

CNER

123567 491011 8

GY

PJ4

5 1 2

LA4 LA321

PJ4

4

LA221

PJ4

3

LA121

PJ4

2

GR

Y R

321

CNCOP

DC

5VG

ND

DC

24V

(W)

S5-

NO

CN

4PU

1-2

Y(W

)C

N4P

U1-

1

3 2 1

CNLV3

GN

DM

8 O

NM

8_LO

CK

GY

GR

GY

CN

7 2 1

321

3

M8

Pow

er S

uppl

y C

oolin

g F

an M

otor

/1

S4-

NO

(W)

R(W

)

6-P1

14 15 168 12 13111094 765321

CNINF2

17 1918 222120

9-R4

CNLV2

21

DC

15V

GN

D

CNLV1

123567 4

FLI

CK

ER

_RE

M

DC

3.3V

H1_

RE

M

GN

D

H3_

RE

M

910

HE

AT

ER

_RY

SLE

EP

_RE

M

8

ZE

RO

CR

OS

S

DC

5V

H2_

RE

M

CN7PU1

1 2 3 5 6 74

SLE

EP

_RE

MH

EA

TE

R_R

Y

H3_

RE

M

9 10

DC

5VH

1_R

EM

FLI

CK

ER

_RE

M

8

H2_

RE

M

ZE

RO

CR

OS

S

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CN

8PU

1-4

GR

PI

CN

8PU

1-3

NC

CNPOW

1 2 3 5 6 74 8

CN5PU1

4 3 2 1

GN

D

GN

D

DC

5VD

C24

V

DC

5VG

ND

DC

24V

123

CN4PU1

GR

Y RGR

R GR

(R)

(W)

RS

5-C

OM

26-E1

CN

CO

P-2

S4-

CO

M

141517 16 81213 11 10 9

DC

24V

47 6 5 3 2 1

CNDM1

GN

DG

ND

DC

5VM

1_R

EM

DC

24V

NC

M1_

LOC

KM

1_C

LKM

1_R

EV

M13

ON

M13

_LO

CK

GN

DM

11_L

OC

KG

ND M

11 O

NC

L3 O

N

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CN

41

2 13

21 3

4

431 2

3 12CN

45 1 2

12CN

59

95 6 7 821 3 4

M1

PJ9

31 2

3 12CN

14

CL3M11M13

GR

YR GY

GR

GR

GR

Y GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

2 135 469 781112 10

M3-PC

PJ1

06

12

GY

GY

Y GY

54321

PJ4Z PC

GR

PJ1Z PC

M3-

PC

-+P

C1-

PC

OND

C5V

GN

D

3 2 1

PJ1

05

PC1-PC

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

10 1211 13 14

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

986 754321

PJ3Z PC

GY

GY

GY

PC2-PC

PJ3

1 123

PC4-PC

PJ2

9 123 3 2 1

PJ3

0

PC3-PC

5 4 3 2 1

PJ1I PC

SIZ

E1

PW

B-I

PC

SIZ

E4

SIZ

E2

SIZ

E3

GN

D

PC

4-P

C O

N

PC

3-P

C O

N

PC

2-P

C O

NDC

5VG

ND

GN

DD

C5V

GN

DD

C5V

PW

B-I

PC

SIZ

E2

SIZ

E3

GN

DS

IZE

4

SIZ

E1

1012 111314

141311 1210

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GN

D

DC

5VD

C5VP

C8-

PC

ON

GN

D

10 1211 13 14

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

9

DC

5V

86 7

PC

6-P

C O

NG

ND P

C9-

PC

ON

5

GN

D

43

PC

7-P

C O

N

21

DC

5VG

ND

DC

5V

PJ6Z PC

GY

GY

GY

CN

107

8 79 6 45 3 12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PC7-PC

PJ1

09

123

PC6-PC

PJ1

10

123 3 2 1PJ1

11

PC9-PC PC5-PC

PJ1

13

1233 2 1PJ1

12

PC8-PC

15

GY

15

15

PC

5-P

C O

N

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

M1-PC

4 3 12

1 2 3 4

CN

101

CN

102

4321

2 134

M2-PC

86 754321

PJ5Z PC

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

B

M2-

PC

M1-

PC

A B ABAA B

Set

Sen

sor

Lift-

Up

Mot

or

PWB-I PC

Pap

er S

ize

Boa

rd

PWB-Z PCPC Control Board

Pap

er F

eed

Mot

or

Ver

tical

Tra

nspo

rt M

otor

Lift-

Up

Sen

sor

Pap

er E

mpt

y S

enso

r

Pap

er T

ake-

Up

Sen

sor

Ver

tical

Tra

nspo

rt S

enso

r

Doo

r S

et S

enso

r

CD

Pap

er S

ize

Sen

sor/

1

Pap

er N

ear-

Em

pty

Sen

sor

CD

Pap

er S

ize

Sen

sor/

2

GN

D

RX

D *

4

DC

5VD

C5V

RT

S

GN

D

FLM

GN

D

A1_

INA

2_IN

TX

D *

3C

LK

DC

24V

GN

D

PJ2Z PC

1 2

14

14

12

12

10

10

8

8

6

64

1CN

44

1 2 3

4 3 2

5

5

7

7

9

9

11

11

13

13

DC

5VG

ND

GN

DF

LMD

C24

VG

ND

CA

SS

ET

TE

_CLK

CA

SS

ET

TE

_TX

D *

3C

AS

SE

TT

E_R

XD

*4

CA

SS

ET

TE

_RT

SD

C5V

GN

D

CNCST

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 128

4 3 127 6 591011 5678 2 134

PJ2A DUPJ1A DU

321

PJ3A DU

DC

5VG

ND P

CI-

DU

ON

3 2 1

PCI-DU

A

4 3 2 1

PJ5A DU

ABB

M2-DUM1-DU

PJ4A DU

1234

B B A A

Duplex Control BoardPWB-A DU

PJ4

0

1st I

mag

e T

rans

fer

Pre

ssur

e/R

etra

ctio

n

CN3PU1

1 2 3 4 5

H3_

RE

MH

2_R

EM

H1_

RE

M

TS

1_O

UT

TS

2_O

UT

21

21

CN

31

CN

30 31 2

1 2 3

BK

WBK

W WF

usin

g U

nit

BK

W W WBK

CN

PO

W-1

CN

PO

W-5

CN

PO

W-2

CN

PO

W-7

CN

5PU

1-1

CN

5PU

1-2

R GR

GR

YC

N5P

U1-

4C

N5P

U1-

3

CN

LV1-

6

CN

LV1-

4C

NLV

1-5

CN

LV1-

7

CN

LV1-

9C

NLV

1-8

CN

LV1-

10C

N7P

U1-

1

CN

7PU

1-3

CN

7PU

1-2

CN

7PU

1-4

CN

7PU

1-8

CN

7PU

1-6

CN

7PU

1-7

CN

7PU

1-5

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

TUBE

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

AT

DC

_CO

NT

_YD

C24

VA

TD

C_M

ON

_Y

CNAT

123567 4

GN

D

9101113 12 816 15 14

431 2CN

62

431 2CN

61

431 2CN

63

431 2CN

64

GN

DN

CD

C24

VN

CN

CD

C5V

GN

D

NC

DC

24V

GN

DP

olyg

on_R

EM

_YP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_Y

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_Y

S/H

B_Y

1LD

_EN

_YS

/H_Y

2S

/HB

_Y2

DC

5V

S/H

_Y1

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_Y

GN

D

CNPH1

1 2 3 5 6 74

SO

S_Y

9 10 11 13128 161514

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

17 18

SO

S_L

OW

_YD

C5V

GY

GY

18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

PJ2D PJ3D

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

14 15 168 12 1311109

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_M

4 765321

CNPH2

Pol

ygon

_LO

CK

_MP

olyg

on_R

EM

_MN

CD

C5V

S/H

_M1

S/H

B_M

1LD

_EN

_MS

/H_M

2S

/HB

_M2

SO

S_L

OW

_MD

C5V

SO

S_M

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_M

GN

D

CNPH4

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

17 18

GY

GY

PJ4D

123567 49101113 12 816 15 14 123567 49101113 12 81617 15 1418

HV1High Voltage Unit

TUBE

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ1EPJ1EPJ1EPJ1E

2 13

PW

B-E

2 13

PW

B-E

2 13

PW

B-E

PW

B-E

3 12

CN

56

2 13

9 10 11

567

5 6 7

91011

8

8

21 3 4

12

12

4

CNCI2

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 128

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/K

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/C

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/Y

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/M

CSIC Developing Section CSIC Hopper Section

141516 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CNPH3

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ5D

L2N2

1 2

CN2PU1

S2

(R)

(R)

(W)

(W)

1A 2A 1B 2B

BK

W

4231

(W)

(W)

(R)

(R)

S1

1

2

CN1PU1

2

L1

BK

WP

G1

(L)

(G)

(N)

Y/G

BK

W

CN

1

WBK

W BK

BK

WBK

W

Mai

n P

ower

Sw

itch

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

CO

MN

O

S5S3

NO

CO

M

2 1

S4

CO

MN

O

4 5321

PJ6D

DC

24V

GN

DP

olyg

on S

/SP

olyg

on L

DP

olyg

on C

LK

Pol

ygon

CLK

Pol

ygon

LD

Pol

ygon

S/S

GN

DD

C24

V

PJ8D

1 2 3 54

GN

DLD

PO

WE

R Y

GN

DS

OS

YD

C5V

DA

TA

2 Y

GN

DD

AT

A1

YD

AT

A1

YG

ND

DA

TA

2 Y

GN

DS

/H1

YS

/HB

1 Y

PJ7D

1 2 3 5 6 74

EN

B Y

9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18

S/H

B2

YS

/H2

Y

GY

GR

GY

GY

YY GY

GR

GR

RGR

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

181714 15 168 12 13111094 765321

PJ9D

4 5321

PJ10D

DC

24V

GN

DP

olyg

on S

/SP

olyg

on L

DP

olyg

on C

LK

181714 15 168 12 13111094 765321

PJ11D

4 5321

PJ12D

DC

24V

GN

DP

olyg

on S

/SP

olyg

on L

DP

olyg

on C

LK

PJ13D

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18

PH Interface BoardPWB-D

Fus

ing

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/1

Fus

ing

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/2

Pre

ssur

e/R

etra

ctio

n C

lutc

h

Mai

n M

otor

1st I

mag

e T

rans

fer

Fro

nt D

oor

Sw

itch/

2

GR

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

YGY

GY

GY

GY

RGY

GY

GY

GR

GY

GY

GY

RGY

GY

GY

GY

YGY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GR

GY

GY

GY

19

SO

S L

OW

Y

DC

5V

19 1919

DC

5V

SO

S L

OW

M

S/H

2 M

S/H

B2

M

EN

B M

S/H

B1

MS

/H1

MG

ND

DA

TA

2 M

GN

DD

AT

A1

MD

AT

A1

MG

ND

DA

TA

2 M

DC

5VS

OS

MG

ND

LDP

OW

ER

MG

ND

DC

5V

SO

S L

OW

C

S/H

2 C

S/H

B2

C

EN

B C

S/H

B1

CS

/H1

CG

ND

DA

TA

2 C

GN

DD

AT

A1

CD

AT

A1

CG

ND

DA

TA

2 C

DC

5VS

OS

CG

ND

LDP

OW

ER

CG

ND

DC

5V

SO

S L

OW

K

S/H

2 K

S/H

B2

K

EN

B K

S/H

B1

KS

/H1

KG

ND

DA

TA

2 K

GN

DD

AT

A1

KD

AT

A1

KG

ND

DA

TA

2 K

DC

5VS

OS

KG

ND

LDP

OW

ER

KG

ND

8-U2

To J24P

125

PJ1D

GN

DY

_HS

YN

CG

ND

EN

G_D

AT

AC

TL_

DA

TA

PD

PO

WE

R_M

ON

ITO

RC

TL_

BU

SY

EN

G_B

US

YN

C

SLE

EP

_RE

MS

UB

SW

_ON

MO

TIO

N_E

NG

ND

TO

DN

C

M_H

SY

NC

GN

DC

_HS

YN

CG

ND

K_H

SY

NC

GN

D

To CNINF2P

(In

PW

B-A

DU

)D

uple

x U

nit T

rans

port

Sen

sor

2

Dup

lex

Uni

t Tra

nspo

rt S

enso

r 1

(In

PW

B-A

DU

)

PC2-DUPC1-DU

Dup

lex

Uni

t Doo

r S

et S

enso

r

Dup

lex

Uni

t Sw

itchb

ack

Mot

or

Dup

lex

Uni

t Tra

nspo

rt M

otor

TUBE

TUBE

TUBE TUBE TUBE TUBE

FERRITE CORE

TUBETUBETUBETUBE

#4066 Duplex(Option) #4067 Lower Feeder Unit(Option)

4th

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

3rd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_YP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_Y

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_Y

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_MP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_M

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_M

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_CP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_C

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_C

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_KP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_K

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_K

17 18 19 20 21

ED

AT

A_Y

GN

D

GN

D

E_D

AT

A_Y

2E

_DA

TA

_Y1

CNINF1

1 765432 1098 11 12 13 14 15 16

E_D

AT

A_K

2G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_K1

GN

DE

NB

DA

TA

_K

E_D

AT

A_C

2E

_DA

TA

_C2

ED

AT

A_C

GN

D

GN

DE

DA

TA

_M

E_D

AT

A_M

1G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_M2

2 1

2 1

CN

1

S2

(R)

(R)

(W)

(W)

1A 2A 1B 2B

4231

(R)

(R)

(R)

(R)

S1

Y/G

PG

1

WBK

W BK

BK

WBK

W

Mai

n P

ower

Sw

itch

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

TUBE

CN

7PU

1-9

GY

CN

7PU

1-10

GY

CN

LV1-

3C

NLV

1-2

CN

LV1-

1G

YG

Y

DC

.3V

GN

D

S3-

CO

MY

R

J9P

-2

CN

LV2-

2J9

P-4

CN

LV2-

1G

R

GR

PI

YG

ND

DC

15V

DC

5V

GN

D

1234

CN8PU1

TUBE

WBK

CN1PU1

2

1

WBK

CN2PU1

JapanChina120V Areas 230V Areas

TUBE

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

Mai

n P

ower

Sw

itch

WBK

W BK

BK

WBK

W

CN

1

W BK

Y/G

(N)

(G)

(L)

PG

1WB

K

CN1PU1

2

1

S1

(R)

(R)

(W)

(W)

1 3 2 4

WBK

2B1B2A1A

(W)

(W)

(R)

(R)

S2

CN2PU1

PG

1

GY

GY

GY

GY

SD

AS

CL

GN

D

DC

5V

NC

45 3 2 1

CNRC

SD

AG

ND

SC

LD

C5V

PJ1R

1 2 3 4

PW

B-R

RT

C B

oard

321

CNSKF

1234N

C

DC

5VG

NDP

C19

ON

GY

GY

GY

PC19

Exi

t Ful

l Sen

sor

PJ5

0

PJ8Z PC

NC

5 7-P

CN6PU1

4 3 2 1

NC

DC

3.3V

GN

DN

CYG

RJ9

P-3

J9P

-1

DC

5VD

C3.

3V

GN

D

J9P

1 2 3 4

Y GR

Y GR

GN

DC

N8P

U1-

2

CN

6PU

1-1

CN

6PU

1-3

CN

8PU

1-1

4-P5

To CNINF1P

3 8-R

To CNINF2

GN

DK

_HS

YN

CG

ND

C_H

SY

NC

GN

DM

_HS

YN

C

NC

TO

DG

ND

MO

TIO

N_E

NS

UB

SW

_ON

SLE

EP

_RE

MNC

EN

G_B

US

YC

TL_

BU

SY

PO

WE

R_M

ON

ITO

R PD

CT

L_D

AT

AE

NG

_DA

TA

GN

DY

_HS

YN

CG

ND

4 17-J

202122 1819 17

CNINF2P

123567 49101113 12 816 15 14

16-J3

To CNINF1

E_D

AT

A_M

2G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_M1

ED

AT

A_M

GN

D

GN

DE

DA

TA

_C

E_D

AT

A_C

2E

_DA

TA

_C2

EN

BD

AT

A_K

GN

D

E_D

AT

A_K

1G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_K2

16 15 14 13 12 11 8910 234567 1

CNINF1P

E_D

AT

A_Y

1E

_DA

TA

_Y2

GN

D

GN

DE

DA

TA

_Y

21 20 19 18 17

234567816 15 14 13 12 11 10 922 17181920212324

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

K_D

AT

A1[

+]K

_DA

TA

1[-]

GN

DK

_DA

TA

2[-]

K_D

AT

A2[

+]

C_D

AT

A2[

+]C

_DA

TA

2[-]

C_D

AT

A1[

-]C

_DA

TA

1[+]

M_D

AT

A1[

+]M

_DA

TA

1[-]

M_D

AT

A2[

-]M

_DA

TA

2[+]

Y_D

AT

A2[

+]Y

_DA

TA

2[-]

Y_D

AT

A1[

-]Y

_DA

TA

1[+]

Y_D

AT

A1[

+]Y

_DA

TA

1[-]

Y_D

AT

A2[

-]Y

_DA

TA

2[+]

M_D

AT

A2[

+]M

_DA

TA

2[-]

M_D

AT

A1[

-]M

_DA

TA

1[+]

C_D

AT

A1[

+]C

_DA

TA

1[-]

C_D

AT

A2[

-]C

_DA

TA

2[+]

K_D

AT

A2[

+]K

_DA

TA

2[-]

GN

D

K_D

AT

A1[

-]K

_DA

TA

1[+]

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

24 23 21 20 19 18 1722 910111213141516 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

J24P

25 1

To PJ1D

2 13-J

Controller BoardPWB-P

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

YGR

GR

GR

GY

R Y GY

DC

24V

GN

D

GN

D

RX

D *

4

DC

5VD

C5V

RT

S

GN

D

FLM

GN

D

A1_

INA

2_IN

TX

D *

3C

LK

PJ7Z PC

1311975321 4 6 8 10 12 14

14 12 10 8 6 1

CN

12 4 3 25791113

L1

2 21

N2

L2

1

N1

L1

2 21

N2

L2

1

N1

TUBETUBE

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1413121110987654321

M

L

K

J

I

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

4039-B001-1A 1/4Aug.2008

8 6-P7 5-P6 4-P

Y_D

AT

A1[

+]Y

_DA

TA

1[-]

Y_D

AT

A2[

-]Y

_DA

TA

2[+]

M_D

AT

A2[

+]M

_DA

TA

2[-]

M_D

AT

A1[

-]M

_DA

TA

1[+]

C_D

AT

A1[

+]C

_DA

TA

1[-]

C_D

AT

A2[

-]C

_DA

TA

2[+]

K_D

AT

A2[

+]K

_DA

TA

2[-]

GN

D

K_D

AT

A1[

-]K

_DA

TA

1[+]

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

24 23 21 20 19 18 1722 910111213141516 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

PJ5

0

Exi

t Ful

l Sen

sor

PC19

GY

GY

GY

PC

19 O

NG

ND

DC

5V

NC

4 3 2 1

CNSKF

1 2 3

RT

C B

oard

PW

B-R

4321

PJ1R

DC

5VS

CL

GN

DS

DA

CNRC

1235 4

NC

DC

5V

GN

D

SC

LS

DA

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CN

7PU

1-10

GY

CN

7PU

1-9

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_K

Pol

ygon

_LO

CK

_KP

olyg

on_C

LK_K

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_C

Pol

ygon

_LO

CK

_CP

olyg

on_C

LK_C

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_M

Pol

ygon

_LO

CK

_MP

olyg

on_C

LK_M

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_Y

Pol

ygon

_LO

CK

_YP

olyg

on_C

LK_Y

2nd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

3rd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

4th

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

PJ1D

25 1

To J24P

2 8-U

GN

DLD

PO

WE

R K

GN

DS

OS

KD

C5V

DA

TA

2 K

GN

DD

AT

A1

KD

AT

A1

KG

ND

DA

TA

2 K

GN

DS

/H1

KS

/HB

1 K

EN

B K

S/H

B2

KS

/H2

K

SO

S L

OW

K

DC

5V

GN

DLD

PO

WE

R C

GN

DS

OS

CD

C5V

DA

TA

2 C

GN

DD

AT

A1

CD

AT

A1

CG

ND

DA

TA

2 C

GN

DS

/H1

CS

/HB

1 C

EN

B C

S/H

B2

CS

/H2

C

SO

S L

OW

C

DC

5V

GN

DLD

PO

WE

R M

GN

DS

OS

MD

C5V

DA

TA

2 M

GN

DD

AT

A1

MD

AT

A1

MG

ND

DA

TA

2 M

GN

DS

/H1

MS

/HB

1 M

EN

B M

S/H

B2

MS

/H2

M

SO

S L

OW

M

DC

5V

19 1919

DC

5V

SO

S L

OW

Y19

GY

GY

GY

1st I

mag

e T

rans

fer

Mai

n M

otor

Pre

ssur

e/R

etra

ctio

n C

lutc

h

Fus

ing

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/2

Fus

ing

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/1

PWB-DPH Interface Board

181714 15 168 12 13111094 765321

PJ13D

Pol

ygon

CLK

Pol

ygon

LD

Pol

ygon

S/S

GN

DD

C24

V

PJ12D

1 2 3 54

PJ11D

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18

Pol

ygon

CLK

Pol

ygon

LD

Pol

ygon

S/S

GN

DD

C24

V

PJ10D

1 2 3 54

PJ9D

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514 17 18

S/H

2 Y

S/H

B2

Y

181714 15 168 12 1311109

EN

B Y

4 765321

PJ7D

S/H

B1

YS

/H1

YG

ND

DA

TA

2 Y

GN

DD

AT

A1

YD

AT

A1

YG

ND

DA

TA

2 Y

DC

5VS

OS

YG

ND

LDP

OW

ER

YG

ND

4 5321

PJ8D

DC

24V

GN

DP

olyg

on S

/SP

olyg

on L

DP

olyg

on C

LK

Pol

ygon

CLK

Pol

ygon

LD

Pol

ygon

S/S

GN

DD

C24

V

PJ6D

1 2 3 54

PJ5D

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

14 15 168 12 13111094 765321

CNPH3

123567 49101113 12 816 15 14

TUBE

High Voltage UnitHV1

18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1141516 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

PJ4D

GY

GY

1817

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

14 15 168 12 13111094 765321

CNPH4

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_M

GN

DS

OS

_MD

C5V

SO

S_L

OW

_M

S/H

B_M

2S

/H_M

2LD

_EN

_MS

/HB

_M1

S/H

_M1

DC

5VN

CP

olyg

on_R

EM

_MP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_M

CNPH2

1 2 3 5 6 74

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_M

9 10 11 13128 161514

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ3DPJ2D

123567 49101113 12 81617 15 1418

GY

GY

DC

5VS

OS

_LO

W_Y

1817

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

14 15 168 12 1311109

SO

S_Y

4 765321

CNPH1

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_Y

GN

DS

/H_Y

1

DC

5VS

/HB

_Y2

S/H

_Y2

LD_E

N_Y

S/H

B_Y

1

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_YP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_Y

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_Y

GN

DD

C24

VN

C

GN

DD

C5V

NC

NC

DC

24V

NC

GN

D

CN

64

21 3 4 CN

63

21 3 4 CN

61

21 3 4CN

62

21 3 4

141516 81213 11 10 9

GN

D

47 6 5 3 2 1

CNAT

AT

DC

_MO

N_Y

DC

24V

AT

DC

_CO

NT

_YG

Y

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CN

7PU

1-5

CN

7PU

1-7

CN

7PU

1-6

CN

7PU

1-8

CN

7PU

1-4

CN

7PU

1-2

CN

7PU

1-3

CN

7PU

1-1

CN

5PU

1-3

CN

5PU

1-4

YGR

GR

RC

N5P

U1-

2

CN

5PU

1-1

1st I

mag

e T

rans

fer

Pre

ssur

e/R

etra

ctio

n

M13 M11 CL3

CN

14

2 13

21 3

PJ9

M1

431 2 8765 9

CN

59

2 1

21

CN

45

2 13

21 3 4

4

31 2

3 12CN

41

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CL3

ON

M11

ON

GN

DM

11_L

OC

KG

ND

M13

_LO

CK

M13

ON

M1_

RE

VM

1_C

LKM

1_LO

CK

NC

DC

24V

M1_

RE

MD

C5V

GN

DG

ND

CNDM1

123567 4

DC

24V

9101113 12 81617 15 14 84 765321

CNPOWN

C

CN

8PU

1-3

PI

GR

CN

8PU

1-4

H2_

RE

M

DC

5V

ZE

RO

CR

OS

S

8

SLE

EP

_RE

MH

EA

TE

R_R

Y

10 9

H3_

RE

M

GN

D

H1_

RE

M

DC

3.3V

FLI

CK

ER

_RE

M

47 6 5 3 2 1

CNLV1

GN

DD

C15

V

1 2

CNLV2

TH3

PJ1

9 3 12

PC2

234

321

CN

35

1

4

TH1TH2

5

2

6

1CN

34 1

6

2 3 4

345

1 2

2 1CN

37

TH5TH4

CN

36

12

21

GY

19

19

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CN

32 151413

2 13

9 10 11

567

5 6 7

91011

8

8

21 3

1415 13

4

12

12

4161718

16 17 18

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

8

DC

5V_I

N

4 765321

DC

5V_O

UT

TH

3 O

N GN

DD

C5V

PC

2 O

NGN

DLE

D_R

EM

CNTH2CNTH1

GN

D

GN

DD

C5V

TH

2 O

N GN

DT

H1

ON

TH

5 O

NGN

DT

H4

ON

*

1 2 3 5 6 74

*

9 10 118

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

CL4

Dev

elop

ing

Clu

tch/

K

PC62 3

PJ3

7 1

Pos

ition

Sen

sor

CN

38 12

21

234

321CN

18 1

4

Ozo

ne V

entil

atio

n F

an M

otor

M14

Tra

y 2

Pap

er F

eed

Clu

tch

CL2

Was

te T

oner

Ful

l Sen

sor

1

PJ4

1 32

PC8

CN

43 12

21

3

1 2 3

12

CN

40

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

LED

_RE

MP

C6

ON G

ND

LED

_RE

MC

L4 O

ND

C24

V

M14

_LO

CK

GN

DM

14 O

NP

C8

ON G

ND

DC

24V

CL2

ON

NC

NC

CNLP

123567 4

NC

9101113 12 816 15 14

GY

GR

Y

Tra

y 1

Pap

er S

ize

VR

UN1

GN

DU

N1

ON

CNTRY2

1 2 3

DC

4.7V

CN

29 21 3

31 2

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Tra

y 1

Pap

er F

eed

Clu

tch

CL5

Tra

y 1

Pap

er E

mpt

y S

enso

r

3

PJ1

7 12

PC13

Tra

y 1

Pic

k-U

p S

olen

oid

SL2 PC142 1

PJ1

8 3

Tra

y 1

Lift-

Up

Sen

sor

1 2

2 1CN

28

234

321

CN

22

1

4

CN

27

12

21

8 109

DC

24V

4 765321

CNTRY1

CL5

ON

LED

_RE

MG

ND

PC

13 O

N

PC

14 O

NGN

DLE

D_R

EM

SL2

ON

DC

24V

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GR

YG

Y

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Suc

tion

Fan

Mot

or

M10

Tem

pera

ture

/Hum

idity

Sen

sor

PJ2

6 2 134

SE3

4

1CN

8 1 2 3

4 3 2 CN

5

2 1

321

3

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

3

1 2 3

12CN

4

Hig

h P

ress

ure

1st I

.T. *

1

Hig

h P

ress

ure

2nd

I.T. *

1

(W)

(W)

R

(W)

R

(W)

Reg

istr

atio

n R

olle

r C

lutc

h

234

321

CN

21

1

4

CN1HV1

123567 4910 8

1814 15 17168 12 1311109

GN

D

4 765321

DC

24V

GN

DD

C24

V4t

h G

RID

_PW

M

2nd

GR

ID_P

WM

2nd

P.C

._R

EM

*2

1st G

RID

_PW

M3r

d G

RID

_PW

M1s

t P.C

._R

EM

*2

GN

DM

10_L

OC

KN

C

M10

ON

SE

3 O

NGN

DS

E3

OND

C5V

D.B

. _C

LK *

61s

t D.B

._A

C_R

EM

*6

2nd_

I.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

11s

t D.B

._D

C_P

WM

*6

1st I

.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

1

I.T._

RE

M *

11s

t I.T

._P

WM

*1

1st I

.T./2

nd I.

T_R

EM

*1

2nd

I.T._

PW

M *

1

3rd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

4th

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

3rd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _A

C_R

EM

*6

4th

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

GN

DG

ND

DC

24V

CNHV1

18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CN2HV1

19

19

CNHV2

1 2 3 5 6 74

DC

24V

9 10 11 13128 16 171514 18

CL1

CN

24

12

21

2 1345

PJ1

3

IDC

/Reg

istr

atio

n S

enso

r /2

SE2SE1

IDC

/Reg

istr

atio

n S

enso

r /1

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Reg

istr

atio

n R

olle

r S

enso

r

OH

P S

enso

r

PJ1

0 3 12 3

PJ1

1 12

PC1 PC4

PJ1

2 5 4 3 12

CN

6 151413

2 13

9 10 11

567

5 6 7

91011

8

8

21 3

1415 13

4

12

12

4161718

16 17 18

181716

18 17 16 4

12

12

4

1315 14

31 2

8

8

11 10 9

765

7 6 5

11109

3 12

13 14 15

CN

20

CL1

ON

18

SE

2_R

EF

DC

24V

GN

DD

C5V

14 15 1716

PC

4 O

N

PC

1 O

N

SE

1 V

O2

8

DC

5V

SE

2 V

O2

GN

D

SE

2 V

O1

12 13

SE

1_R

EF

11109

SE

1 V

O1

GN

D

DC

5V

LED

_RE

M

LED

_RE

M

4 765321

CNSEN

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PW

B-I

PJ1I

4 35

SIZ

E2

SIZ

E3

SIZ

E1

1

GN

D

2

SIZ

E4

PW

B-I

Tra

y 2

Pap

er S

ize

Boa

rd

PC11

Tra

y 2

Pap

er N

ear-

Em

pty

Sen

sor

PC12

Tra

y 2

Dev

ice

Det

ectio

n S

enso

r

2 1

PJ3

9 32 13

PJ3

8

5

2

6

1CN

9 1

6

2 3 4

345

PJ1

5 3 12 3

PJ1

6 12

Tra

y 2

Pap

er E

mpt

y S

enso

r

PC10

Tra

y 2

CD

Pap

er S

ize

Sen

sor

PC9

CNMP

1 2 3 5 6 74

GN

D

LED

_RE

M

LED

_RE

M

GN

D

LED

_RE

M

9 10 11

GN

D

1312

PC

9 O

N

LED

_RE

M

SIZ

E1

PC

10 O

N

8

GN

D

PC

12 O

N

PC

11 O

N

16 171514

SIZ

E2

SIZ

E3

GN

DS

IZE

4

PW

B-I

AT

DC

_CO

NT

_MD

C24

VA

TD

C_M

ON

_MG

ND

AT

DC

_CO

NT

_CD

C24

VA

TD

C_M

ON

_CG

ND

AT

DC

_CO

NT

_KD

C24

VA

TD

C_M

ON

_KG

ND

Pol

ygon

_CLK

_CP

olyg

on_L

OC

K_C

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_C

NC

DC

5V

S/H

_C1

S/H

B_C

1LD

_EN

_CS

/H_C

2S

/HB

_C2

SO

S_L

OW

_CD

C5V

SO

S_C

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_C

GN

D

19

NC

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_K

GN

DS

OS

_KD

C5V

SO

S_L

OW

_K

S/H

B_K

2S

/H_K

2LD

_EN

_KS

/HB

_K1

S/H

_K1

DC

5VN

C

Pol

ygon

_RE

M_K

Pol

ygon

_LO

CK

_KP

olyg

on_C

LK_K

DC

24V

GN

D

Hea

ting

Rol

ler

The

rmis

tor/

3

Fus

ing

Pre

ssur

e R

olle

r T

herm

isto

r/2

Fus

ing

Pre

ssur

e R

olle

r T

herm

isto

r/1

Hea

ting

Rol

ler

The

rmis

tor/

1

Hea

ting

Rol

ler

The

rmis

tor/

2

Exi

t Sen

sor

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

DC

24V

DC

24V

GN

DG

ND

4th

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

3rd

D.B

. _D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd

I.T._

PW

M *

11s

t I.T

./2nd

I.T

_RE

M *

11s

t I.T

._P

WM

*1

I.T._

RE

M *

1

1st I

.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

11s

t D.B

._D

C_P

WM

*6

2nd_

I.T. M

ON

ITO

R *

11s

t D.B

._A

C_R

EM

*6

D.B

. _C

LK *

6

1st P

.C._

RE

M *

23r

d G

RID

_PW

M1s

t GR

ID_P

WM

2nd

P.C

._R

EM

*2

2nd

GR

ID_P

WM

4th

GR

ID_P

WM

DC

24V

GN

DD

C24

VG

ND

GN

DD

C24

VN

CD

C5V

S/H

_K1

S/H

B_K

1LD

_EN

_KS

/H_K

2S

/HB

_K2

SO

S_L

OW

_KD

C5V

SO

S_K

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_K

GN

D

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_C

GN

DS

OS

_CD

C5V

SO

S_L

OW

_C

S/H

B_C

2S

/H_C

2LD

_EN

_CS

/HB

_C1

S/H

_C1

DC

5V NC

NC

DC

5V

S/H

_M1

S/H

B_M

1LD

_EN

_MS

/H_M

2S

/HB

_M2

SO

S_L

OW

_MD

C5V

SO

S_M

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_M

GN

D

NC

DC

24V

GN

D

S/H

B_Y

1LD

_EN

_YS

/H_Y

2S

/HB

_Y2

DC

5V

S/H

_Y1

GN

DLD

_PO

WE

R_Y

GN

DS

OS

_Y

SO

S_L

OW

_YD

C5V

PWB-M (1/2)Mechanical Control Board

T1

T2

Imag

ing

Uni

t/K

Imag

ing

Uni

t/C

Imag

ing

Uni

t/M

Imag

ing

Uni

t/Y

17

NC

PH Unit/Y PH Unit/MG

YG

YG

YG

YG

Y

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PH Unit/C

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PH Unit/K

GY

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

2827262524232221201918171615

M

L

K

J

I

H

G

F

E

D

C

B

A A

B

C

D

E

F

G

H

I

J

K

L

M

4039-B001-1A 2/4Aug.2008

PWB-M (2/2)Mechanical Control Board

CN

44-4

CN

44-1

CN

44-6

CN

44-5

CN

44-8

CN

44-9

CN

44-7

CN

44-1

1C

N44

-10

CN

44-1

3C

N44

-14

CN

44-1

2

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

9 18-N

10 19-N

11 21-N

8-R3

To CNINF1P

R

E_D

AT

A_M

2G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_M1

ED

AT

A_M

GN

D

GN

DE

DA

TA

_C

E_D

AT

A_C

2E

_DA

TA

_C2

EN

BD

AT

A_K

GN

D

E_D

AT

A_K

1G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_K2

1615141312118 9 102 3 4 5 6 71

CNINF1

E_D

AT

A_Y

1E

_DA

TA

_Y2

GN

D

GN

DE

DA

TA

_Y

2120191817

TUBE TUBE TUBE TUBE

FERRITE CORE

TUBETUBETUBETUBE

TUBE

To CNINF2P

GN

DK

_HS

YN

CG

ND

C_H

SY

NC

GN

DM

_HS

YN

C

NC

TO

DG

ND

MO

TIO

N_E

NS

UB

SW

_ON

SLE

EP

_RE

M

NC

EN

G_B

US

YC

TL_

BU

SY

PO

WE

R_M

ON

ITO

RP

D

CT

L_D

AT

AE

NG

_DA

TA

GN

DY

_HS

YN

CG

ND

CN

19-7

CN

13-5

CN

13-3

CN

13-4

CN

13-7

CN

13-6

CN

13-1

CN

13-2

CN

13-1

0

CN

13-8

CN

19-1

CN

13-1

1

CN

19-5

CN

19-6

CN

19-3

CN

19-2

CN

19-4

GY

GR

R GR

GR

GY

Y Y GY

GY

GR

GY

12 CO

MN

O

S3 S5

NO

CO

M

CSIC Hopper SectionCSIC Developing Section

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/M

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/Y

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/C

TC

EE

PR

OM

Boa

rd/K

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

8 12111094 765321

CNCI2

4

12

12

431 2

8

8

11 10 9

765

7 6 5

11109

3 12CN

562 13

PW

B-E

PW

B-E

3 12

PW

B-E

3 12

PW

B-E

3 12

PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E PJ1E

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

TUBE

8 12111094 765321

CNCST

GN

D

DC

5VC

AS

SE

TT

E_R

TS

CA

SS

ET

TE

_RX

D *

4C

AS

SE

TT

E_T

XD

*3

CA

SS

ET

TE

_CLK

GN

DD

C24

VF

LMG

ND

GN

DD

C5V

4 9-R

20 21 2218 1917

CNINF2

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 13128 161514

1 6-P

(W)

R(W

)S

4-N

O

Pow

er S

uppl

y C

oolin

g F

an M

otor

/1

M8

3

1 2 3

12

CN

7G

Y

GR

GY

M8_

LOC

KM

8 O

N GN

D

CNLV3

123

CN

4PU

1-1

(W)

Y

CN

4PU

1-2

S5-

NO

(W)

DC

24V

GN

DD

C5V

CNCOP

1 2 3

RY GR

PJ4

2 1 2

LA1

PJ4

3 1 2

LA2

PJ4

4 1 2

LA3LA421

PJ4

5

GY

811 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CNER

LA2

ONG

ND

LA3

ONG

ND

LA4

ON G

ND

LA1

ON

NC

NC

NC

GN

D

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

(W)

(BL)

* *

CNMT

12

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

4 3 2 1

CNSM

AABB

41 2 3

M4

PJ2

0

PJ7

M7321 4 93 6 7 84 51 2

M2

PJ8

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

NC

M2_

RE

MD

C5V

GN

DG

ND

DC

24VA A

M2_

H/L

M2_

LOC

KM

2_C

LK

BB

CNDM3

123567 49101113 12 8

PJ6

M321 54 8763 9

PJ5

41 2 3

Ton

er S

uppl

y M

otor

Y/M

M6

CN

39 2 1

321

3

M12

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/1

141516 81213 11 10 9

M12

_LO

CK

47 6 5 3 2 1

CNDM2

M12

ON G

ND B B

M3_

CLK

M3_

LOC

KM

3_H

/LAA

DC

24V

GN

DG

ND

DC

5VM

3_R

EMNC

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

Pre

ssur

e/R

etra

ctio

n M

otor

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ3

2 1

M5PC32 1

PJ1

3

Fus

ing

Loop

Det

ect S

enso

r

Pre

ssur

e P

ositi

on S

enso

r

3

PJ2

12

PC7

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PC162 1

PJ2

2 3

Bla

ck P

C D

rive

Sub

Sen

sor

PC172 1

PJ2

3 3

Col

or P

C D

rive

Mai

n S

enso

r

PC152 1

PJ2

1 3

Bla

ck P

C D

rive

Mai

n S

enso

r

Col

or P

C D

rive

Sub

Sen

sor

3

PJ2

4 12

PC18

CN

3

2 13567

5 6 7 8

8

21 3 4

4CN

17

2 13

9 10 11

567

5 6 7

91011

8

8

21 3 4

12

12

4

GY

GN

D

201814 15 17168 12 1311109

LED

_RE

M

4 765321

CNPC

19

GN

DP

C17

ON

LED

_RE

MG

ND

LED

_RE

MP

C18

ONG

ND

LED

_RE

MP

C15

ON

LED

_RE

MG

ND

PC

7 O

NM

5 O

N

PC

3 O

NGN

DLE

D_R

EM

PC

16 O

NGN

D

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ1EPJ1EPJ1EPJ1E

2 13

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/KP

WB

-E

2 13

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/CP

WB

-E

2 13

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/YP

WB

-E

PW

B-E

IU E

EP

RO

M B

oard

/M

3 12

CN

55

2 13

9 10 11

567

5 6 7

91011

8

8

21 3 4

12

12

4

CNCI1

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3G

ND

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

DC

SIC

_TX

D *

3C

SIC

_RX

D *

4

1 2 3 5 6 74

GN

D

9 10 11 128

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

18 141517 16 81213 11 10 9

GN

D

47 6 5 3 2 1

CNDUP

19

DC

24V

DU

P_C

OV

ER

_OP

DU

P_F

EE

D_P

SD

UP

_EX

IT_P

S

NC

DC

5VD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_B

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_AD

UP

_FE

ED

_PD

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NA

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NB

DU

P_S

ET

NC

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_B

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_A

DU

P_R

EV

_PD

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_EN

BD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_E

NA

M6

M7

M4

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3G

ND

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

DC

SIC

_TX

D *

3C

SIC

_RX

D *

4G

ND

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

2nd

Imag

e T

rans

fer

2nd

Imag

e T

rans

fer

Col

or D

evel

opin

g M

otor

Ton

er S

uppl

y M

otor

C/K

Col

or P

C D

rum

Mot

or

Fus

ing

Driv

e M

otor

I.T. U

nit *

1

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/Y

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/M

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/C

Mai

n E

rase

Lam

p/K

Fro

nt D

oor

Sw

itch/

1

Rig

ht D

oor

Sw

itch

GN

DC

SIC

_RX

D *

4C

SIC

_TX

D *

3

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

GN

D

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

CS

IC_T

XD

*3

CS

IC_R

XD

*4

GN

D

NC

CNTM

NC

GN

DN

C

GN

DN

CN

CN

CN

C

NC

CNR2FAN

1 2 3 5 6 74 9 10 11 128

GR

GY

GR

RGR

M22

Coo

ling

Fan

Mot

or/2

GN

DM22

ON

M22

_LO

CK

CN

42

2 31

23 1

Z

Y

X

W

V

U

T

S

R

Q

P

O

NN

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

Z

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1413121110987654321

Aug.20084039-B001-1A 3/4

4-J6 5-J7 6-J8

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

TUBE TUBE

N1

1

L2N2

1 22

L1 N1

1

L2N2

1 22

L1

PWB-PController Board

13-J2

To PJ1D

125

J24P

234567816 15 14 13 12 11 10 922 17181920212324

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

GN

D

K_D

AT

A1[

+]K

_DA

TA

1[-]

GN

DK

_DA

TA

2[-]

K_D

AT

A2[

+]

C_D

AT

A2[

+]C

_DA

TA

2[-]

C_D

AT

A1[

-]C

_DA

TA

1[+]

M_D

AT

A1[

+]M

_DA

TA

1[-]

M_D

AT

A2[

-]M

_DA

TA

2[+]

Y_D

AT

A2[

+]Y

_DA

TA

2[-]

Y_D

AT

A1[

-]Y

_DA

TA

1[+]

1718192021

ED

AT

A_Y

GN

D

GN

D

E_D

AT

A_Y

2E

_DA

TA

_Y1

CNINF1P

17 6 5 4 3 210 9 8111213141516

E_D

AT

A_K

2G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_K1

GN

DE

NB

DA

TA

_K

E_D

AT

A_C

2E

_DA

TA

_C2

ED

AT

A_C

GN

D

GN

DE

DA

TA

_M

E_D

AT

A_M

1G

ND

GN

DE

_DA

TA

_M2

To CNINF1

3 16-J

141516 81213 11 10 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CNINF2P

1719 1822 21 20

17-J4

GN

DY

_HS

YN

CG

ND

EN

G_D

AT

AC

TL_

DA

TA PD

PO

WE

R_M

ON

ITO

RC

TL_

BU

SY

EN

G_B

US

YN

C

SLE

EP

_RE

MS

UB

SW

_ON

MO

TIO

N_E

NG

ND

TO

DN

C

M_H

SY

NC

GN

DC

_HS

YN

CG

ND

K_H

SY

NC

GN

D

To CNINF2

5 4-P

CN

8PU

1-1

CN

6PU

1-3

CN

6PU

1-1

CN

8PU

1-2

GN

DG

R

Y GR

Y

4321

J9P

GN

D

DC

3.3V

DC

5V

J9P

-1

J9P

-3G

R

YN

CG

ND

DC

3.3VN

C

1234

CN6PU1

7-P5

PG

1

CN2PU1

S2

(R)

(R)

(W)

(W)

1A 2A 1B 2B

BK

W

4231

(W)

(W)

(R)

(R)

S1

1

2

CN1PU1

BK

WP

G1

(L)

(G)

(N)

Y/G

BK

W

CN

1

WBK

W BK

BK

WBK

W

Mai

n P

ower

Sw

itch

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

TUBE

230V Areas120V AreasChina

JapanCN2PU1

BK

W

1

2

CN1PU1

BK

W

TUBE

CN8PU1

4 3 2 1

GN

D

DC

5V

DC

15V

GN

DYP

IG

R

GR

CN

LV2-

1

J9P

-4C

NLV

2-2

J9P

-2

YS

3-C

OM

GN

DD

C.3

V

GY

GY

CN

LV1-

1C

NLV

1-2

CN

LV1-

3

TUBE

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

Mai

n P

ower

Sw

itch

WBK

W BK

BK

WBK

W

PG

1Y

/G

S1

(R)

(R)

(R)

(R)

1 3 2 4

2B1B2A1A

(W)

(W)

(R)

(R)

S2

CN

1 12

12

TUBE

Fro

nt D

oor

Sw

itch/

2N

OC

OM

S4

Prim

ary

Inte

rlock

Sw

itch

Mai

n P

ower

Sw

itch

WBK

W BK

BK

WBK

W

CN

1

W BK

Y/G

(N)

(G)

(L)

PG

1WB

K

L1

2

CN1PU1

2

1

S1

(R)

(R)

(W)

(W)

1 3 2 4

WBK

2B1B2A1A

(W)

(W)

(R)

(R)

S2

CN2PU1

21

N2

L2

CN

LV1-

10

CN

LV1-

8C

NLV

1-9

CN

LV1-

7

CN

LV1-

5C

NLV

1-4

CN

LV1-

6

CN

PO

W-7

CN

PO

W-2

CN

PO

W-5

CN

PO

W-1

BK

WWWBK

Fus

ing

Uni

tWWB

K

WBK

321

21 3

CN

30

CN

31 1 2

1 2T

S2_

OU

TT

S1_

OU

T

H1_

RE

MH

2_R

EM

H3_

RE

M

54321

CN3PU1

S4-

CO

MC

NC

OP

-2

1 26-E

S5-

CO

MR

(W)

(R)

GR

R GR

RY GR

CN4PU1

3 2 1

DC

24V

GN

DD

C5V

DC

24V

DC

5V

GN

D

GN

D

1234

CN5PU1

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

ZE

RO

CR

OS

S

H2_

RE

M

8

FLI

CK

ER

_RE

MH

1_R

EM

DC

5V

109

H3_

RE

M

HE

AT

ER

_RY

SLE

EP

_RE

M

4 765321

CN7PU1

DC Power SupplyPU1

1

N1

J13P

1 49

PJ01HDD

HDDHard Disc

502

2 50491

J26P

NC NC

J27P

1 91922

94 18418393

J6P

Memory Module(DIMM)DIMM0

(Expansion)(Option)

J28P

NC

DIMM1Memory Module(DIMM)

J4P93 183

18494

2 92911

J15P

231

Bat

tery

Compact Flash CardCF_CARD

CNCF

J22P

1359 7

W GY

GY

Y PI

OR

OR

Y PI

GR

TUBE

810 9 47 6 5 3 2 1

CN2OP

Control PanelPWB-OP

810 6 4 2

LARGECLOSED END CONNECTORS

OUTPUT OF ACTIVEHIGH OR LOWINPUT OF ACTIVEHIGH OR LOW

DC5V

CLOSED END CONNECTORS

OUTPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH

DC24V

INPUT OF ACTIVE LOW

INPUT OF ACTIVE HIGH

#187 WITH HOUSING

#250 WITH HOUSING

OUTPUT OF ACTIVE LOW



CLOSED END CONNECTORSSMALL

MEDIUM

DESTINATION

DESCRIPTION

LOCATION

CLOSED END CONNECTORSEXTRA LARGE

20-L20

#110 WITH HOUSINGPOSITIVE LOCK RECEPTACLE

N

O

P

Q

R

S

T

U

V

W

X

Y

ZZ

Y

X

W

V

U

T

S

R

Q

P

O

N

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

2827262524232221201918171615

Aug.20084039-B001-1A 4/4

CN

CS

T-1

1

CN

CS

T-1

2

CN

CS

T-9

CN

CS

T-1

0

CN

CS

T-7

CN

CS

T-6

CN

CS

T-8

CN

CS

T-4

CN

CS

T-5

CN

CS

T-2

CN

CS

T-1

CN

CS

T-3

CN

DU

P-4

CN

DU

P-6

CN

DU

P-5

CN

DU

P-2

CN

DU

P-3

CN

DU

P-8

CN

DU

P-7

CN

DU

P-1

1

CN

DU

P-9

CN

DU

P-1

7C

ND

UP

-18

CN

DU

P-1

3C

ND

UP

-12

CN

DU

P-1

5C

ND

UP

-16

CN

DU

P-1

4

CN

DU

P-1

GY

GR

GY

GY

YY GY

GR

GR

RGR

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

21-K1119-K10

18-K9

13 11 9 7 5 234

CN

12 168101214

1412108641 2 3 5 7 9 11 13

PJ7Z PC

CLK

TX

D *

3

A2_

INA

1_IN

GN

D

FLM

GN

D

RT

SD

C5V

DC

5V

RX

D *

4

GN

D

GN

DD

C24

V

GY

YR GY

GR

GR

GR

Y GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

NC

PJ8Z PC

#4067 Lower Feeder Unit(Option)#4066 Duplex(Option)

Dup

lex

Uni

t Tra

nspo

rt M

otor

Dup

lex

Uni

t Sw

itchb

ack

Mot

or

Dup

lex

Uni

t Doo

r S

et S

enso

r

PC1-DU PC2-DU

(In

PW

B-A

DU

)D

uple

x U

nit T

rans

port

Sen

sor

1

Dup

lex

Uni

t Tra

nspo

rt S

enso

r 2

(In

PW

B-A

DU

)

GR

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

YGY

GY

GY

GY

RGY

GY

GY

GR

GY

GY

GY

RGY

GY

GY

GY

YGY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GR

PJ4

0

PWB-A DUDuplex Control Board

AABB

4 3 2 1

PJ4A DU

M1-DU M2-DU

B B APJ5A DU

1234

A

PCI-DU

123

PC

I-D

U O

NG

ND

DC

5V

PJ3A DU

1 2 3

PJ1A DU PJ2A DU

4 3 128 7 6 511 10 9 567 2 134

13

13

11

11

9

9

7

7

5

5

234

321

CN

44

1

4 6

6

8

8

10

10

12

12

14

14

21

PJ2Z PC

GN

DD

C24

V

CLK

TX

D *

3

A2_

INA

1_IN

GN

D

FLM

GN

D

RT

SD

C5V

DC

5V

RX

D *

4

GN

D

CD

Pap

er S

ize

Sen

sor/

2

Pap

er N

ear-

Em

pty

Sen

sor

CD

Pap

er S

ize

Sen

sor/

1

Doo

r S

et S

enso

r

Ver

tical

Tra

nspo

rt S

enso

r

Pap

er T

ake-

Up

Sen

sor

Pap

er E

mpt

y S

enso

r

Lift-

Up

Sen

sor

Ver

tical

Tra

nspo

rt M

otor

Pap

er F

eed

Mot

or

PC Control BoardPWB-Z PC

Pap

er S

ize

Boa

rd

PWB-I PC

Lift-

Up

Mot

or

Set

Sen

sor

BA A B ABA

M1-

PC

M2-

PC

B

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PJ5Z PC

1 2 3 4 5 76 8

M2-PC

4 3 12

1 2 3 4

CN

102

CN

101

4321

2 134

M1-PC

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PC

5-P

C O

N

15

15

GY

15

PC8-PC

PJ1

12

123 3 2 1PJ1

13

PC5-PCPC9-PC

PJ1

11

1233 2 1PJ1

10

PC6-PC

3 2 1PJ1

09

PC7-PC

987654321

2 135 469 78

CN

107

GY

GY

GY

PJ6Z PC

DC

5V

GN

DD

C5V

1 2

PC

7-P

C O

N

3 4

GN

D

5

PC

9-P

C O

NG

NDP

C6-

PC

ON

76 8

DC

5V

9

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

141311 1210

GN

DPC

8-P

C O

ND

C5V

DC

5V

GN

D

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

10 1211 13 14

14 13 1112 10

SIZ

E1

SIZ

E4

GN

D

SIZ

E3

SIZ

E2

PW

B-I

PC

DC

5VG

ND

DC

5VG

ND

GN

DD

C5V

PC

2-P

C O

N

PC

3-P

C O

N

PC

4-P

C O

N GN

D

SIZ

E3

SIZ

E2

SIZ

E4

PW

B-I

PC

SIZ

E1

PJ1I PC

12345

PC3-PC

PJ3

0 1233 2 1

PJ2

9

PC4-PC3 2 1

PJ3

1

PC2-PC

GY

GY

GY

PJ3Z PC

1 2 3 4 5 76 8 9

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

141311 1210

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

PC1-PC

PJ1

05

123

GN

DD

C5V

PC

1-P

C O

N+ -

M3-

PC

PJ1Z PC

GR

PJ4Z PC

1 2 3 4 5

GY

Y GY

GY

2 1

PJ1

06

M3-PC

1012 11 8 79 6 45 3 12

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

YGR

GR

GR

GY

R Y GR

15 14 13 91011 5678 2 13412161718

18 17 16 12 4 3 128 7 6 511 10 9131415

CN

15

4

4 3 127 6 5

76531 2CN

19

CN

13

21 3

91011

5 6 7

567

9 10 11

8

8

2 134

4

DU

P_F

EE

D_P

DD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_A

DU

P_E

XIT

_PS

DU

P_F

EE

D_P

SD

UP

_CO

VE

R_O

PD

C24

VG

ND

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_EN

AD

UP

_RE

V_M

O_E

NB

DU

P_R

EV

_PD

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_A

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_B

DU

P_S

ET

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NB

DU

P_F

EE

D_M

O_E

NA

DU

P_R

EV

_MO

_BD

C5VNC

*5

CW/CCW : Clock Wise/Counter Clock Wise

RXD : Reception Data

*4

TXD : Transmission Data

*3

*2

P.C. : Photo Conductor

*1

I.T. : Image Transfer

*6

D.B. : Developing Bias

GY

GY

GY

M1-

DU

M2-

DU

From the lower cassette

In case of two add-on papercassettes or more

© 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.© 2006 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

Printed in JapanPrinted in JapanDD4039-A-FE1DD4039-A-FE1

Use of this manual should be strictly supervised toavoid disclosure of confidential information.Use of this manual should be strictly supervised toavoid disclosure of confidential information.

magicolor7450_7450MKIIFieldService

Documents

Transcript of magicolor7450_7450MKIIFieldService